JP7267969B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game medium enters a prize winning area such as a winning hole provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, A pachinko machine that enhances game interest by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display results. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko game machine, when the stop pattern mode when the variable display of the display patterns in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is brought to the player. Then, there is a game machine that controls to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.

As such a game machine, a plurality of types of production modes with different degrees of reliability of pre-reading advance notice for special variable games are set, and the production mode is changed based on the player's operation of the chance button. A modified gaming machine has been proposed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2012-143551 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement with respect to the effect executed for the special figure fluctuation game common to the pre-reading advance notice.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the performance effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
A first effect state (for example, a state of being controlled in a normal mode) is a different effect state from the first effect state, and the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the same as the first effect state. 2 production states (for example, the state of being controlled to the color display expectation level up mode, etc.), production state control means (for example, FIGS. 8-10 to 8-12, etc.) that can be controlled,
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, FIGS. 8-27, Figure 8-34, etc.) and
with
The advantageous state is obtained when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the control is performed in the first performance state. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
Predetermined effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 8-13, 8-15, 8-32, 8-33) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state etc.),
The predetermined effect executing means has, as the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of weak winning) and a second predetermined effect (for example, It is possible to execute (for example, flash performance at the time of strong winning) and (for example, FIG. 8-15),
When the suggestive performance is not executed when the second performance state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled, and when the second performance state is controlled, the suggestive performance is executed. Execution of the second predetermined effect can be restricted both when it is controlled to the advantageous state without
The predetermined effect executing means performs the above when the suggestive effect is not executed and the advantageous state is not controlled when the first effect state is controlled, and when the first effect state is controlled. The second predetermined effect can be executed both when the suggestive effect is not executed and when the advantageous state is controlled,
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the control is not performed to the advantageous state even though the second predetermined effect is executed, and the player's It is possible to prevent the expectation from being spoiled and improve the performance effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 007AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to a characteristic portion 007AK; (A) to (F) are diagrams showing effect images that can be used for corresponding display related to the characteristic part 007AK. (A) is a diagram for explaining a specific period related to the characteristic part 007AK. (B) is a diagram for explaining the execution timing of the active display change during the second specific period related to the characteristic part 007AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern based on characteristic part 007AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of cross keys related to the characteristic portion 007AK; (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining the selection of the effect mode after switching according to the characteristic portion 007AK. (A) is a diagram for explaining the switching of the presentation mode when the mode switching operation is performed when the suspension information related to the characteristic part 007AK is not stored. (B) is a diagram for explaining the switching of the production mode when the mode switching operation is performed when the suspension information related to the characteristic part 007AK is stored. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 007AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing concerning feature part 007AK. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of mode switching processing related to the feature part 007AK; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of mode switching processing related to the feature part 007AK; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing related to the characteristic part 007AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the holding related data storage part based on the characteristic part 007AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a prize-winning flash effect determination table related to the characteristic part 007AK; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a background change effect determination table related to the characteristic portion 007AK; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of corresponding display effect setting processing related to the characteristic portion 007AK; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a color-based display effect determination table relating to the characteristic part 007AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a table for determining a pending display effect during execution of a color corresponding display effect related to the characteristic part 007AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a table for determining a pending display effect when color-based display effect is not executed related to the characteristic part 007AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special character production|presentation determination table based on the characteristic part 007AK. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a color retention change pattern related to a characteristic portion 007AK. (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a pending change pattern when executing a color pending display effect when the total pending memory number related to the characteristic part 007AK is 1; (C) is a diagram showing an example of determination of a pending change pattern when executing a color pending display effect when the total pending memory number related to the characteristic part 007AK is 2 or more. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a character suspension change pattern related to a characteristic portion 007AK. (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a pending change pattern when executing a character pending display effect related to the characteristic portion 007AK. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change timing pattern with 0 change timings related to the characteristic part 007AK. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change timing pattern with one change timing relating to the characteristic part 007AK. (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change timing pattern with two change timings related to the characteristic part 007AK. (A) is a diagram showing a determination example of a pending change timing pattern when the change timing related to the characteristic part 007AK is 0 times. (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a pending change timing pattern when the change timing related to the characteristic portion 007AK is one. (C) is a diagram showing a determination example of a pending change timing pattern when the change timings related to the characteristic part 007AK are two times. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of corresponding display-related effect processing related to the characteristic part 007AK. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic part 007AK; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active change pattern related to a characteristic part 007AK. (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of an active change pattern related to the characteristic part 007AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an active display change execution timing determination table related to the characteristic part 007AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the chance production|presentation determination table based on the characteristic part 007AK. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to the characteristic portion 007AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 007AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 007AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 007AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4; Yes). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt processing for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the number of normal pattern reservation memory is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the judgment results such as the generation of starting winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead judgment to the production control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small-hit mid-performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end performance. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 007AK)
Characteristic portion 007AK according to the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 007AK, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the characterizing portion 007AK, the game effect lamp 9 includes a first starting winning hole lamp 9A provided superimposed on the winning ball device 6A in which the first starting winning hole is formed, and a hitting ball. and a handle lamp 9B superimposed on the operation handle 30. The characterizing part 007AK is configured to be able to execute a corresponding display lamp effect and a flash effect at the time of winning as a predetermined effect using the first starting winning hole lamp 9A. Further, the characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to execute a premium effect as a special effect using the handle lamp 9B. The corresponding display lamp effect and the premium effect will be described later. The winning flash effect will be described below.

When the game ball that has entered (passed through) the first start winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, the first start winning is generated, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Along with, if the number of first reserved storage is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol game executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the decoration symbol executed in the image display device 5 A first starting condition for executing variable display such as variable display of is established. When the game ball entering the second start winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, the second start winning occurs, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second start winning opening is detected. 2 If the number of pending memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") or less, the second special symbol game executed in the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decoration symbol executed in the image display device 5 A second starting condition for executing variable display is established.

After the first start condition for executing the variable display such as the first special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, the variable display is based on the establishment of the first start condition. is executed (started). The first start condition is established, for example, when the variable display based on the previously established first start condition or the second start condition to be described later is not executed and the jackpot game state is not controlled. Although the first start condition has been met due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize, the first start condition has not yet been met (for example, a variable display based on the first start condition or second start condition that has been met earlier is being executed. or when it is controlled to a jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display based on the first start winning is suspended (becomes a state of waiting for execution), and is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process processing. The data indicating the display result (including the jackpot type) extracted based on the occurrence of the first start winning in the start winning determination process and the random number value for determining the variation pattern are the pending information related to the variable display. It is stored (reserved) as (first special figure reservation information). The stored pending information (first special figure pending information) is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and variable display based on the digested pending information (first special figure pending information) is executed. be.

After the second start condition for executing the variable display such as the second special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the variable display is based on the establishment of the second start condition. is executed (started). The second start condition is met, for example, when the variable display based on the first start condition or the second start condition, which has been met earlier, is not executed and the jackpot game state is not controlled. Although the second start condition has been met due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the second start condition has not yet been met (for example, the variable display based on the first start condition or second start condition that has been met first is being executed. or when it is controlled to a jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display based on the second start winning is suspended (becomes a state of waiting for execution), and executed in step S101 of the special symbol process processing The data indicating the display result (including the jackpot type) extracted based on the occurrence of the second start winning in the start winning determination process and the random number value for determining the variation pattern are the pending information related to the variable display. It is stored (reserved) as (second special figure reservation information). The stored pending information (second special pending information) is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and variable display based on the digested pending information (second special pending information) is executed. be.

Hereinafter, when the first start-up prize and the second start-up prize are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "start-up prize". Further, hereinafter, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "start condition". A start condition is also referred to as an execution condition.

In the above-described win-time flash effect, the first start win-win lamp 9A is set in a predetermined manner based on the start condition (execution condition) of the variable display targeted for the win-time flash effect being established due to the occurrence of the start win. light (e.g., lighting), and outputs a winning flash effect sound, which is a predetermined sound effect, from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is suggested that it is controlled to a favorable state. The ratio (expectation degree ) is high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the win-time flash effect is executed, thereby improving the game interest. The win-time flash effect may be executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect for foretelling the degree of expectation of winning in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). In this embodiment, in the winning flash effect, the first starting winning hole lamp 9A is illuminated and the winning flash effect sound, which is a sound effect, is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. This is only an example, and in the flash effect at the time of winning, the first start winning entrance lamp 9A may be illuminated while sound effects using the speakers 8L and 8R may not be output.

Hereinafter, the variable display result (variable display result of special symbols) in the special game will be "big win" or "minor win", and the degree of expectation (ratio) to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state , may be referred to as “hit expectation”. A high hit expectation means a high rate of being controlled in an advantageous state. When the variable display result in the special game is determined to be a "big win" or a "minor win", it is also said that the variable display result in the special game is "hit". If the variable display result in the special game is not determined as "big hit" or "minor win", it is also said that the variable display result in the special game is "losing".

The prize-winning flash performance is started when the condition for starting the variable display targeted for the prize-winning flash performance is established based on the occurrence of the starting prize, and ends when the variable display ends. Note that this is only an example, and the execution period (start timing and end timing) of the winning flash effect can be set arbitrarily. For example, the prize-winning flash effect is started when the condition for starting the variable display targeted for the prize-winning flash effect is satisfied based on the occurrence of the start winning, and based on the satisfaction of the start condition for the variable display. It may be configured to end when the variable display is started. Alternatively, the win-time flash effect is started when the condition for starting the variable display targeted for the win-win flash effect is satisfied based on the occurrence of the start winning, and a predetermined timing during the variable display (for example, as described later) It may be configured to end at the timing of developing from normal reach to super reach, etc.).

In the characteristic part 007AK, as flash effects at the time of winning, there are flash effects at the time of weak winning as a first predetermined effect, and a second predetermined effect having a higher rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state (expectation for winning) than the flash effect at the time of weak winning. It is configured to be able to execute a flash effect at the time of a strong prize. According to this configuration, when the winning flash effect is executed, the player is made to pay attention to which of the weak winning flash effect and the strong winning flash effect is executed as the winning flash effect. , can improve the game interest. In the weak winning flash effect, the first start winning opening lamp 9A is lit in purple and the speaker is lit on the basis that the start condition for the variable display targeted for the weak winning flash effect is established due to the occurrence of the start winning. By outputting the winning flash effect sound from 8L and 8R, the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display is suggested. In the strong winning flash effect, the first start winning opening lamp 9A is lit in gold and the speaker is lit on the basis that the start condition for the variable display targeted for the strong winning flash effect is satisfied due to the occurrence of the start winning. By outputting the winning flash effect sound from 8L and 8R, the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display is suggested.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that a win-time flash effect is executed as the predetermined effect, but this is only an example, and the predetermined effect may be any desired effect. For example, as the predetermined effect, any pre-reading announcement effect different from the flash effect at the time of winning, such as a mini character effect, may be executed. In the mini-character performance, an animation showing how a predetermined mini-character dances is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 based on establishment of the start condition for the variable display targeted for the mini-character performance due to the occurrence of the starting prize. Therefore, it is only necessary to suggest that control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display. Alternatively, as the predetermined effect, for example, a BGM (Background Music) effect may be executed, which foretells the expected degree of winning in the variable display being executed. In the BGM effect, predetermined music is output as BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the start of the variable display targeted for the BGM effect, and control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display. It should be suggested.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic part 007AK.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 07AKA1, a first reserved display area 07AKB1, and a second reserved display area 07AKB2 are provided. In the active display area 07AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 07AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display such as the first special game whose execution is reserved and the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the number of the first reserved memories. . In the second reserved display area 07AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display such as the second special game whose execution is reserved and the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the number of the second reserved memories. . The pending display in the first pending display area 07AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 07AKB2 is also called "second pending display". Hereinafter, when the first pending display and the second pending display are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "suspended display".

The first pending display area 07AKB1 may be configured so that the first pending display is displayed right aligned, for example. The first reservation display area 07AKB1 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first reservation memory number "4". , "4". The first start winning prize is generated, and the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is increased based on the establishment of the first start condition. At this time, if there is no other first pending display in the first pending display area 07AKB1, the incremented first pending display is displayed at the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 07AKB1. As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new first pending display is added. If there is another first reserved display in the first reserved display area 07AKB1, a display that is in a non-display state on the left side of the display portion where the other first reserved display is performed in the first reserved display area 07AKB1. At the site (the display site corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as a pending display corresponding to the increased first pending memory number, a production image showing a new first pending display Add display. When there are one or a plurality of first reserved displays in the first reserved display area 07AKB1, when a new first special figure game is started based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first reserved display area In 07AKB1, the first pending display is erased (digested) at the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1". At this time, if there are first pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those first pending displays are shifted to the right in the direction of the erased display part ( move). As described above, in the first reserved display area 07AKB1, according to the number of first reserved memories, the first special game whose execution has not yet been started and the variable display of the decoration pattern, which corresponds to the variable display, is displayed. 1 pending display is enabled.

The second pending display area 07AKB2 may be configured so that the second pending display is displayed left aligned, for example. The second reservation display area 07AKB2 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second reservation storage number "4". , "4". The second start winning prize is generated, and the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is increased based on the establishment of the second start condition. At this time, if there is no other second pending display in the second pending display area 07AKB2, at the left end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second pending display area 07AKB2, the incremented second pending As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new second pending display is added. If there is another second reserved display in the second reserved display area 07AKB2, a display that is in a non-display state on the right side of the display portion where the other second reserved display is performed in the second reserved display area 07AKB2. At the site (the display site corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as the pending display corresponding to the increased second pending memory number, a production image showing a new second pending display Add display. When there are one or a plurality of second pending displays in the second pending display area 07AKB2, when a new second special figure game is started based on the establishment of the second start condition, the second pending display area In 07AKB2, the second pending display is erased (digested) at the left end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1". At this time, if there are second pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those second pending displays are shifted to the left in the direction of the erased display parts ( move). In this way, in the second reserved display area 07AKB2, according to the number of second reserved memories, the second game corresponding to the variable display such as the second special game whose execution has not yet been started and the variable display of the decoration pattern is reserved. 2 pending display is enabled.

In the active display area 07AKA1, in response to the start of the first special game, active display is started in a display mode corresponding to the first reserved display erased in the first reserved display area 07AKB1. That is, in response to the start of the first special game, the first pending display erased in the first pending display area 07AKB1 is shifted to the active display. Also, in the active display area 07AKA1, in response to the start of the second special game, active display is started in a display mode corresponding to the second reserved display erased in the second reserved display area 07AKB2. That is, in response to the start of the second special game, the second pending display erased in the second pending display area 07AKB2 is shifted to the active display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, effect images different from the background image, such as pending display (first pending display, second pending display), active display, and decoration pattern, are displayed superimposed on the background image. FIG. 8-2 shows a state in which a normal background image representing the scenery of the daytime sky is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the background image. The characteristic portion 007AK is configured to be able to execute a background change effect for changing the background image from the normal background image to a special background image representing the scenery of the night sky. In the background change effect, the background image is changed from the normal background image to the special background image based on the establishment of the start condition for the variable display targeted for the background change effect due to the occurrence of the start prize, and the variable display is performed. It is suggested that it is controlled in an advantageous state based on. In the characteristic part 007AK, it is expected that the case where the background change effect is executed for the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display, compared to the case where the background change effect is not executed for the variable display. It is configured so that the degree (hit expectation) is high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the background change effect is executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. The background change effect may be executed as a look-ahead preview effect. In the present embodiment, the background change effect is started when the starting condition for the variable display targeted for the background change effect is satisfied due to the occurrence of the starting prize, and ends when the variable display ends. do.

A mode display area 07AKC1 is provided at the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . Although the details will be described later, in the characteristic part 007AK, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured to be controllable to any one of a plurality of production modes during the game, and in the mode display area 07AKC1, the currently controlled production mode is displayed. Mode notification to be notified, selection mode notification to notify which effect mode is currently selected as the effect mode after switching, mode switching notification to notify that the effect mode is switched, waiting (holding) for switching the effect mode It is configured to be able to execute various notifications related to the production mode, such as a mode switching preparation display that notifies that the game is being performed.

Hereinafter, the suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are collectively referred to as the corresponding display. Characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to execute a corresponding display effect of changing the corresponding display such as the suspended display and the active display to a special display mode different from the normal display mode (display in the special display mode). The normal display mode is a display mode when the corresponding display effect is not executed (normal display mode). In the corresponding display effect as the suggestive effect, by changing the corresponding display to the special display mode, the variable display corresponding to the corresponding corresponding display which is the target of the corresponding display effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. is suggested. Hereinafter, a change in the corresponding display due to the corresponding display effect will be referred to as a "corresponding display change". In the corresponding display effect, the display mode of the corresponding display changes step by step by executing the corresponding display change one time or a plurality of times, and changes to the final display mode as the final display mode.

The corresponding display effects include a pending display effect and an active display effect. In the suspension display effect, at least one of the first suspension displays in the first suspension display area 07AKB1 or at least one of the second suspension displays in the second suspension display area 07AKB2 is changed to a special display mode. , it is suggested that the variable display corresponding to the suspended display changed to the special display mode, which is the variable display targeted for the suspended display effect, is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The pending display effect may be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect. Hereinafter, the change in the display mode of the pending display due to the pending display effect will be referred to as "suspended display change". Pending display changes are included in the corresponding display changes. In the active display effect, by changing the active display in the active display area 07AKA1 to a special display mode, control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display corresponding to the active display, which is the variable display targeted for the active display effect. It is suggested that The active display effect may be executed as the advance notice effect. Hereinafter, the change in the display mode of the active display due to the active display effect will be referred to as "active display change". Active display changes are included in the corresponding display changes.

The corresponding display effect, the win-time flash effect, and the background change effect are configured to be executable in parallel with common variable displays as targets. That is, based on the fact that the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the starting prize, the corresponding display effect, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the background change effect can be executed in parallel for the variable display. there is It should be noted that, as an effect using the image display device 5, a predetermined zone image (for example, " A zone effect in which a effect image representing the message "chance zone" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be executable. In the zone effect, a zone image is displayed on the basis of establishment of a starting condition for the variable display targeted for the zone effect due to the occurrence of the starting winning, thereby controlling the game to an advantageous state based on the variable display. should be suggested.

In this embodiment, the corresponding display effect is executed as the suggestive effect, but this is only an example, and the suggestive effect may be any effect. For example, as the suggestive effect, any pre-reading preview effect such as story effect may be executed. In the story effect, a predetermined story (for example, a main character fighting an enemy character) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 based on the condition for starting the variable display, which is the target of the story effect, being established due to the occurrence of the starting prize. It is only necessary to suggest that control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display by displaying an animation showing how the story unfolds. Alternatively, as the suggestive effect, any forewarning effect such as cut-in effect may be executed. In the cut-in effect, a predetermined cut-in image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 based on the start of the variable display to be targeted for the cut-in effect. It suffices if it is suggested to be controlled in an advantageous state.

FIGS. 8-3(A) to 8-3(F) show effect images that can be used for corresponding displays such as suspension display and active display regarding the characteristic portion 007AK. The effect image 07AKE1 shown in FIG. 8-3(A) is a round and white effect image. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE1 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "white". The effect image 07AKE2 shown in FIG. 8-3(B) is a round blue effect image. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE2 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "blue". The effect image 07AKE3 shown in FIG. 8-3(C) is a round green effect image. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE3 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "green". The effect image 07AKE4 shown in FIG. 8-3(D) is a round red effect image. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE4 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "red". The effect image 07AKE5 shown in FIG. 8-3(E) is a round white effect image representing a predetermined first special character. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE5 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "white character". The effect image 07AKE6 shown in FIG. 8-3(F) is a round red effect image representing a predetermined second special character. Hereinafter, the display mode in which the effect image 07AKE6 is displayed as the corresponding display is referred to as "red character". Also, hereinafter, the first special character and the second special character are collectively referred to as "special characters".

"White" is the normal display mode (display mode when the corresponding display effect is not executed), and "blue", "green", "red", "white character", and "red character" are normal display. It is a special display mode different from the mode. Hereinafter, display modes in which effect images of colors different from white (colors different from "white") such as "blue", "green", and "red" are displayed as corresponding displays are collectively referred to as color display modes. Further, hereinafter, a display mode in which effect images representing special characters (first special character, second special character) such as "white character" and "red character" are displayed as corresponding displays will be referred to as character display modes.

The characterizing portion 007AK is configured to be able to execute, as the corresponding display effects, a color corresponding display effect as a first type of suggestive effect and a character corresponding display effect as a second type of suggestive effect. The color correspondence display effect is a correspondence display effect for changing the corresponding display to one of the color display modes such as "blue", "green" and "red". The character corresponding display effect is a corresponding display effect for changing the corresponding display to one of the character display modes such as "white character" and "red character". Specifically, in the present embodiment, a color-reserved display effect and a color-active display effect are configured to be executable as color-based display effects. The color reserved display effect is a reserved display effect for changing the reserved display to any of the color display modes. The color active display effect is an active display effect that changes the active display to any of the color display modes. Further, in the present embodiment, as the display effect corresponding to the character, a character pending display effect can be executed. The character suspension display effect is a suspension display effect for changing the suspension display to one of the character display modes.

Hereinafter, the character pending display effect that changes the pending display to "white character" is called "white character pending display effect", and the character pending display effect that changes the pending display to "red character" is called "red character pending display effect". called. When the white character pending display effect and the red character pending display effect are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "character pending display effect". The red character pending display effect as the suggestive effect of the first display mode is common to the color correspondence display effect as the suggestive effect of the first type in that a effect image of a color different from white is displayed as the corresponding display. . On the other hand, the white character pending display effect as the suggestive effect of the second display mode is different from the color correspondence display effect in that a white effect image is displayed as the corresponding display. That is, the red character pending display effect is a effect using a specific display element common to the color corresponding display effect, such as a color different from white, and the white character pending display effect is a effect not using the specific display element.

In the present embodiment, the specific display element commonly used by the suggestive effect of the first display mode such as the red character pending display effect and the suggestive effect of the first type such as the color-based display effect is the color of the effect image. However, this is only an example, and the specific display element can be, for example, the shape of the effect image, the pattern of the effect image (for example, cherry blossom pattern, striped pattern, etc.), or the type of character represented by the effect image. It can be a display element.

In the present embodiment, the active display rendering for changing the active display to any of the character display modes is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the color display mode is a display mode (suspended display effect and active display effect) in which the color display mode can be changed between a suspended display effect (color suspended display effect) and an active display effect (color active display effect). In contrast, the character display mode can be changed by the pending display effect (character pending display effect), while the display mode does not change depending on the active display effect (suspended display effect is set as a unique display mode).

When the color-based display effect is executed for one variable display, both the character-based display effect and the color-based display effect are performed for the one variable display, and the one variable display is performed. A case where color-based display effects are executed without executing character-based display effects for display is included. When both the character corresponding display effect and the color corresponding display effect are executed for one variable display, the character pending display effect as the character corresponding display effect is executed for the one variable display. As a result, after the pending display corresponding to the one variable display changes to the character display mode, the one variable display is subjected to a color active display effect as a color-based display effect, thereby executing the one variable display. The active display corresponding to the display changes from the character display mode to the color display mode as the final display mode. When the color-based display effect is executed without executing the character-based display effect for one variable display, both the color-reserved display effect and the color-active display effect are performed for the one variable display. It includes a case where it is executed and a case where only one of the color reserved display effect and the color active display effect is executed for the one variable display. When both the color-reserved display effect and the color-active display effect are executed for one variable display, the one variable display is executed by executing the color-reserved display effect for the one variable display. After the pending display corresponding to is changed to a color display mode different from the final display mode, the active display corresponding to the one variable display is finalized by executing the color active display effect targeting the one variable display. The display mode changes to a color display mode. When only one of the color-reserving display effect and the color-active display effect is executed for one variable display, the one variable display is executed by executing the color-reserving display effect for the one variable display. When the reserved display corresponding to the display changes to the color display mode that is the final display mode, and the color active display effect is not executed for the one variable display, and the color reserved display effect is performed for the one variable display. A case where the active display corresponding to the one variable display is changed to a color display mode that is the final display mode by executing the color active display effect targeting the one variable display without being executed. include.

In the present embodiment, as the active display effect, a white active display effect can be executed in which the active display is changed from character display modes such as "white character" and "red character" to "white" as the normal display mode. It is When the character-based display effect is executed for one variable display, the character-based display effect and the color-based display effect are performed for the one variable display, and the one variable display is performed. A case in which a character corresponding display effect and a white active display effect are executed is included as an object. When the character corresponding display effect and the color corresponding display effect are executed for one variable display, the character pending display effect as the character corresponding display effect is executed for the one variable display. After the suspended display corresponding to the one variable display is changed to the character display mode, the one variable display is changed to the one variable display by executing the color active display effect as the color-based display effect for the one variable display. The corresponding active display changes from the character display mode to the color display mode as the final display mode. When the character corresponding display effect and the white active display effect are executed for one variable display, the character pending display effect as the character corresponding display effect is executed for the one variable display. After the suspended display corresponding to the one variable display changes to the character display mode, the active display corresponding to the one variable display is changed to the character display by executing the white active display effect for the one variable display. mode to "white" as the final display mode.

When the color correspondence display effect is executed and the corresponding display changes to one of the color display modes such as "blue", "green", and "red", the color correspondence display effect is not executed and the corresponding display is " The probability of winning is higher than when it is displayed in "white" (the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state is high). Further, when the color correspondence display effect is executed and the correspondence display changes to any one of the color display modes, the hit expectation is high in the order of "blue"<"green"<"red". That is, the expectation is high in the order of "white" < "blue" < "green" < "red". As described above, in the characteristic part 007AK, the corresponding display effect is controlled to the first mode such as "blue" and the advantageous state such as "green" and "red" (win expectation). is higher than the first mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the corresponding display effect is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game. It is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the plurality of types of modes the corresponding display effect is executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the characteristic part 007AK, when the character suspension display effect is executed and the suspension display changes to the character display mode, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension display which is the variable display subject to the character suspension display effect. , on the screen of the image display device 5, a special character effect can be executed to display an animation showing a dance of the special character represented by the suspended display of the character display mode. The special character effect is a effect corresponding to the suspended display of the character display mode. In the character suspension display effect, by changing the suspension display to the character display mode, control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display corresponding to the suspension display, and the special character performance is executed during the execution of the variable display. It is suggested that When the white character pending display effect is executed and the pending display changes to "white character" representing the first special character, the first special character effect is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the special character effect corresponding to the pending display. A first special character effect is executed in which an animation showing how the character dances is displayed. The first special character effect is a effect corresponding to the pending display of "white character". When the red character pending display effect is executed and the pending display changes to "red character" representing the second special character, the second special character effect is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a special character effect corresponding to the pending display. A second special character effect is executed in which an animation showing how the character dances is displayed. The second special character effect is a effect corresponding to the pending display of "red character". Hereinafter, when the first special character presentation and the second special character presentation are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "special character presentation".

In the characteristic part 007AK, when the character suspension display effect is executed and the suspension display changes to the character display mode, the special character effect is executed during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension display, and the variable display. There is a case where the special character effect is not executed (a so-called fake case) during the execution of . When the reserved display changes to the character display mode, the case where the special character presentation is executed during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the reserved display is better than the case where the special character presentation is not executed during the execution of the variable display. Expectations are also high. In addition, the case where the red character pending display effect is executed and the pending display changes to "red character" is more likely than the case where the white character pending display effect is executed and the pending display changes to "white character". A high proportion of the special character presentation is executed during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the pending display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the character suspension display effect is executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, interest in the game can be improved by drawing attention to which of the white character pending display effect and the red character pending display effect is executed as the character pending display effect.

As described above, the characterizing part 007AK is configured to be able to execute the corresponding display lamp effect using the first starting prize winning entrance lamp 9A. In the corresponding display lamp performance, the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the special display mode on the basis of the execution of the corresponding display performance and the change of the corresponding display to the special display mode. Concretely, when the corresponding display changes to "blue" by the corresponding display effect, the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is lit in blue in the corresponding display lamp effect. When the corresponding display is changed to "green" by the corresponding display effect, the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is lit in green in the corresponding display lamp effect. When the corresponding display is changed to "red" by the corresponding display effect, the first start winning hole lamp 9A is lit in red in the corresponding display lamp effect. When the correspondence display is changed to "white character" by the correspondence display presentation, the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is flashed in white in the correspondence display lamp presentation (white lighting and extinguishing are repeated). When the corresponding display is changed to "red character" by the corresponding display performance, the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is flashed in red in the corresponding display lamp performance (repeatedly turning on and off in red). The corresponding display lamp effect may be executed as a look-ahead forewarning effect. In the present embodiment, the corresponding display lamp effect is started when the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display lamp effect changes to the special display mode, and when the variable display ends. terminate based on

The win-time flash effect executed using the game effect lamp 9 (first start prize-winning entrance lamp 9A) common to the corresponding display lamp effect is intended for the variable display common to the corresponding display effect in the same way as the win-time flash effect. The effect is more likely to be recognized by the player in association with the corresponding display effect than the executable background change effect, and has a higher relevance to the corresponding display effect than the background change effect.

The corresponding display effect can be executed during a specific period from when the start condition for the variable display targeted for the corresponding display effect is satisfied by the occurrence of the start prize until the end of the variable display. The specific period will be described below using a specific example shown in FIG. 8-4(A). FIG. 8-4 (A) shows that the starting winning prize is generated when the variable display (“the variation”) is executed in a state where the total number of pending memories is “3”. This is an example of a case where the condition for starting "target variation", which is a variable display based on the target of the corresponding display effect, is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the starting condition of the "target fluctuation" is established based on the start winning during the execution of "the fluctuation", and after the "change" is completed, the start Variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored at the time of winning is executed as "retained 1st variation", "retained 2nd item variation", and "retained 3rd item variation", and "retained 3rd item variation" is executed. "Target variation" is started after is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the specific period during which the corresponding display effect is executed is when the starting condition of the "target fluctuation" is established based on the occurrence of the start winning during the execution of the "subject fluctuation". It starts and ends when the "target variation" ends.

In the specific period, the first specific period is the period from when the condition for starting the variable display to be the target of the corresponding display effect is established due to the occurrence of the start winning to when the variable display is started, and the variable display is started. and a second specific period, which is a period from the start to the end of the variable display. The second specified period is a period after the first specified period. In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), after the start condition of "target variation" is met based on the occurrence of the start winning during the execution of "the variation", "the variation", "the first hold The first specified period is the period from the end of "change", "second pending change", and "third pending change" to the start of "target change". The period until the "target variation" ends is the second specific period.

The corresponding display effect includes a first pattern in which the corresponding display effect is executed at least in the first specific period, and a second pattern in which the corresponding display effect is executed in the second specific period without executing the corresponding display effect in the first specific period. , can be executed in any execution pattern. The first pattern includes an execution pattern in which the corresponding display effect is executed in the first specific period and the corresponding display effect is also executed in the second specific period, and a corresponding display effect in the first specific period while executing the second specific display effect. and an execution pattern in which the corresponding display effect is not executed during the period.

In the first specific period, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display effect is displayed as a suspended display, and the suspended display effect is executed as the corresponding display effect. In the second specific period, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display effect is displayed as the active display, and the active display effect is executed as the corresponding display effect.

In the pending display effect as the corresponding display effect, the pending display change is executed at one or a plurality of timings among a plurality of preset timings within the first specific period, and corresponds to the variable display targeted for the pending display effect. The hold display to be changed to the special display mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the pending display is shifted to the active display (the first pending display area 07AKB1 or the second pending display area 07AKB2) is the timing at which the pending display change can be executed within the first specific period. The timing at which the active display corresponding to the pending display erased in ) is displayed in the active display area 07AKA1), the timing at which the pending display is displayed as the first pending display (the first pending display area 07AKB1 or the second pending display Timing displayed in the display area corresponding to the pending number "1" in the display area 07AKB2), timing at which the pending display is displayed as the second pending display (first pending display area 07AKB1 or second pending display area 07AKB2 Timing displayed at the display part corresponding to the pending number "2"), timing at which the pending display is displayed as the third pending display (first pending display area 07AKB1 or second pending display area 07AKB2 Hold number 4 timings are set in advance.

In the active display effect as the corresponding display effect, the active display change is executed at one or a plurality of timings out of a plurality of preset timings within the second specific period, and corresponds to the variable display targeted for the active display effect. The active display changes to the special display mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, five timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5 shown in FIG. 8-4(B) are set in advance as timings at which the active display change can be executed within the second specific period. Timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 8-4(B) and 8-5.

FIG. 8-5 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern regarding the characteristic part 007AK. A plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-5 are different from each other in the variable display mode of the special figure variation time and the decoration pattern. The special pattern fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to the stop display (derivation) of the fixed special pattern in the special pattern games such as the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game. be. Note that, in addition to the variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-5, variation patterns not shown in FIG. 8-5, such as variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or multiple times, may be provided.

In the plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-5, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3, PB1, which are variation patterns in which the variable display mode does not become the ready-to-win mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern and the ready-to-win state is not established. -1, PB1-2, and variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA3-1, and PA3-2, which are variation patterns in which the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern and the ready-to-reach is established. ,It is included.

In the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA3-1, and PA3-2 in which the variable display mode is the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern, "left", "left", " After the variable display of the decorative design is started in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the "middle" and "right", the decorative design is different from the stop display in the "left" decorative design display area 5L. is temporarily stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the same decorative pattern as that temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R. As a result, the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win game is established.

In the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA3-1, and PA3-2 in which the variable display mode is the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach performance is performed based on the variable display being the reach mode. executed. In this embodiment, as the ready-to-win effect, a normal ready-to-win effect (normal reach) and a super ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win) with a higher expectation of winning than the normal ready-to-win effect are configured to be executable. When the super ready-to-win effect is executed during the variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed (developing from the normal ready-to-win effect to the super ready-to-win effect). Specifically, in the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA3-1, and PA3-2 in which the variable display mode is the reach mode during the variable display of the decoration pattern, the variable display mode is the reach mode. Based on the variation patterns PA2-1 and PA3-1 in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed based on this, and the variable display mode being the ready-to-win mode, the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Variation patterns PA2-2 and PA3-2 are included.

In the normal ready-to-win effect, an effect image showing a message “reach!” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the super ready-to-win effect, the win/lose effect is executed after the battle effect is executed. In the battle production, an animation is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 showing how a predetermined main character and a predetermined enemy character fight. In the win/lose effect as the notification effect, an animation representing either the hero character winning or losing the enemy character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby controlling to an advantageous state. It is notified whether or not Specifically, in the super ready-to-win effect, either a win effect or a defeat effect is executed as the win/lose effect. In the victory effect, an animation showing the hero character winning over the enemy character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby notifying that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state. In the defeat effect, an animation showing the hero character being defeated by the enemy character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby notifying that the control is not in an advantageous state.

In the variation pattern PA2-1 among the variation patterns PA2-1 and PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed, the display result of the variable display is "loss", and the control is not performed in an advantageous state, while in the variation pattern PA3-1, The display result of the variable display becomes a "hit" such as a "big hit" or a "minor hit", and is controlled to be in an advantageous state. In the variation pattern PA2-2 of the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA3-2 in which the super reach effect is executed, the display result of the variable display is "loss", and the control is not performed in an advantageous state, while in the variation pattern PA3-2 , the display result of the variable display becomes "hit" and is controlled to be in an advantageous state. In the variation pattern PA2-2, in the super ready-to-win effect, a defeat effect is executed as a win/loss effect, and it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state. In the variation pattern PA3-2, in the super ready-to-win effect, a victory effect is executed as a win/loss effect, and it is notified that the game is controlled in an advantageous state.

In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, for example, at a rate corresponding to the expected degree of hit, one of the plurality of types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-5 is determined as the usage pattern. Just do it. For example, when the variable display result is "hit", the variation pattern may be determined to execute the super ready-to-win effect at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "losing".

Returning to FIG. 8-4(B), among the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5 set in advance as timings at which the active display change during the second specific period can be executed, at the timing 07AKT1, the variable display mode is the reach mode. In the variation pattern, a predetermined number within the period during which the variable display of the decorative design ("all design variation") is performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It's timing. Timing 07AKT2 is the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed ("left design temporary stop") in the "left" decoration design display area 5L in the variation pattern in which the variable display mode is the ready-to-win mode. Timing 07AKT3 is the same as the decoration pattern temporarily stopped in the "right" decoration design display area 5R and the "left" decoration design display area 5L in the variation pattern in which the variable display mode is the reach mode. This is the timing at which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed ("right symbol temporary stop"), the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win state is established. Timing 07AKT4 is the timing at which the normal ready-to-win effect ends and the super ready-to-win effect starts (timing to develop from normal ready-to-win to super ready-to-win) in the variation pattern in which the super ready-to-win effect is executed. Timing 07AKT5 is the timing immediately before the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed (started) in the variation pattern in which the super ready-to-win effect is executed. The time difference between the timing 07AKT5 as special timing and the timing at which the winning/losing effect (notification effect) is executed as specific timing is extremely small (for example, 0.1 second), and these timings are the same timings depending on the player. recognized as That is, the timing 07AKT5 is substantially the same timing (substantially the same timing) as the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the special timing is substantially the same timing as the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed as the specific timing, and is the timing 07AKT5 which is the timing immediately before the win/lose effect is executed. However, this is only an example, and the special timing is substantially the same timing as the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed (the time difference from the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed is extremely small, and the timing at which the win/lose effect is executed by the player). If it is the timing recognized as the same timing as ), it may be the timing immediately after the win-lose effect is executed. Note that the special timing may be the same timing as the specific timing.

Of the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5, for example, the timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5, which are the timings later than the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3, are closer to the timings at which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed than the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3. In addition, at timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5, respectively, there is a branching of effects such as whether or not there is development to super reach, the type of winning/losing effect (whether a winning effect or a losing effect is executed). degree is suggested. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the effects executed at the timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5 than the effects executed at the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3. That is, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the active display effect is performed at, for example, first timings such as timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3, and second timings such as timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5, in which the degree of attention (interest) of the player to the effects is higher than that of the first timings. It is configured to be executable in timing and.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, even if any of the plurality of types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-5 is determined as the usage pattern, It is configured such that active display change can be executed at timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5 shown in FIG. 8-4(B). For example, in the variation pattern setting process, even if a variation pattern in which the variable display mode is not a ready-to-win mode or a variation pattern in which a super-ready-to-win effect is not executed is determined as a usage pattern, active display can be performed at timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5. .

In the characterizing part 007AK, four types of production modes, namely, a normal mode, a color display expectation increasing mode, a color display premium mode, and a chance production increasing mode, are prepared in advance as production modes, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated during the game. , and is configured to be controllable to any one of these production modes. One or a plurality of production modes different from these production modes may be provided.

In the present embodiment, depending on which production mode is being controlled, the hit expectation level when the color corresponding display production is executed, that is, the big winning game state or the small winning game state based on the color corresponding display production It is configured such that the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state, such as a state, is different. Specifically, in the state of being controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode as the second effect state, compared to the case where the color corresponding display effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the normal mode as the first effect state. When the color corresponding display effect is executed, control is performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display targeted for the color corresponding display effect (variable display corresponding to the corresponding display changed to the color display mode by the color corresponding display effect). The percentage of winning is high (high expectation of winning). Further, the color-responsive display effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the color display premier mode as the third effect state, rather than the case of executing the color-responsive display effect in the state of being controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode. The ratio of control to an advantageous state based on the variable display that is the target of the color-based display rendering is higher in the case where the color-based display rendering is performed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the color display premier mode is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the color corresponding display effect can be executed, while the color display premier mode is controlled. When the control is not in an advantageous state, the color corresponding display effect is not executed. In other words, when the color-based display effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the color display premier mode, the control is always performed in an advantageous state based on the variable display targeted for the color-based display effect. That is, when the color display premier mode is controlled, by executing the color corresponding display effect, it is definitely notified that the variable display to be subjected to the color corresponding display effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. be done. When the color-based display effect is executed under control in the normal mode, and when the color-based display effect is executed under control in the chance effect-up mode, the color-based display effect is targeted. The ratios controlled to the advantageous state based on the different variable displays are the same as each other. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning when the display effect corresponding to color is executed is set to be higher in the order of normal mode or increased chance effect mode<increased color display expectation mode<color display premier mode. It is configured.

In the characteristic part 007AK, when the color-based display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, the above-described premium effect can be performed during the period from the start to the end of the color-based display effect. is configured to In the premium effect as a special effect, the steering wheel lamp 9B is flashed in red (repeatedly turned on and off in red) based on the fact that the color corresponding display effect is executed while being controlled in the color display premiere mode. In addition, by outputting a premium performance sound, which is a predetermined sound effect, from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is advantageous based on the variable display that is the target of the color-based display performance, which is the variable display that is the target of the premium performance. It is deterministically notified that the state is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the color-based display effect is executed in the color display premier mode, thereby improving the game interest.

In the present embodiment, when the color-based display effect is executed while the color display premier mode is being controlled, the premium effect is started based on the execution of the first corresponding display change in the color-based display effect. When the variable display targeted for the color-based display effect ends, the premium effect ends. Note that this is merely an example, and the execution period of the premium effect may be any period that at least partially overlaps with the period from the start to the end of the color-based display effect. For example, when the color-based display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, the premiere effect is started based on the execution of the first corresponding display change in the color-based display effect, and the color is displayed. The premium effect may be terminated based on the corresponding display change being executed in the corresponding display effect and the corresponding display being changed to the final display mode (final display mode). Alternatively, when the color-based display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, based on the fact that the condition for starting the variable display targeted for the color-based display effect is met due to the occurrence of the starting prize, A premium effect is started before the color-dependent display effect is started, and the premium effect is ended based on the fact that the corresponding display is changed to the final display mode by executing the corresponding display change in the color-dependent display effect. It may be configured as Alternatively, when the color-based display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, the premium effect is started based on the execution of the first corresponding display change in the color-based display effect, and the corresponding color is displayed. After the variable display targeted for the corresponding display effect ends and the corresponding color corresponding display effect ends, the premium effect may end based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). good.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the premium effect is executed as the special effect, but this is only an example, and the special effect may be any effect. For example, the ball-hitting operation handle 30 is configured to incorporate a blower for discharging air from a discharge port provided in the ball-hitting operation handle 30 and a vibrator for vibrating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. A special effect using the blower and the vibrator may be executed. In the special effect, a blower is used to discharge air from the discharge port and the ball-hitting operation handle 30 is gripped based on the execution of the color-corresponding display effect when the color display premier mode is controlled. A vibrator is used to vibrate the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and the vibration is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and a special sound effect, which is a predetermined sound effect, is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. By outputting the effect sound, it is only necessary to definitely notify that the variable display to be the target of the color-corresponding display effect, which is the variable display to be the target of the special effect, is controlled to be in an advantageous state.

As advantageous states, a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage for the player are prepared in advance, and when the color display premier mode is controlled, the color-based display effect is executed. When controlled to an advantageous state with a high degree of advantage for the player based on the target variable display, a special effect such as a premium effect or a special effect is executed. When a color-corresponding display effect is executed and controlled to an advantageous state with a low advantage for the player based on the variable display targeted for the color-corresponding display effect, the special effect is not executed. good too. According to such a configuration, when the special effect is executed when the color corresponding display effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the color display premier mode, the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state with a high degree of advantage. is reported definitively. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the color-based display effect is executed in the color display premier mode, thereby improving the game interest.

For example, the advantageous state is a first advantageous state such as "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)" which is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a jackpot game state with a first predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5 times). , The first advantageous state, such as "probability variable big hit" controlled to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state, and a second predetermined number (for example, 15 times) of the number of rounds larger than the first predetermined number. and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the above. In this case, when the color display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is being controlled, and the second advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display targeted for the color display effect, the premier mode is executed. While special effects such as effects and special effects are executed, when the color display premier mode is controlled, the color corresponding display effects are executed, and the first advantageous state is achieved based on the variable display targeted for the color corresponding display effects. When controlled, it may be configured not to execute the special effect.

The characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to execute a chance presentation. In the chance production, an animation showing a predetermined chance character dancing is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during a period in which the variable display targeted for the chance production is being performed, so that the variable display is performed. It is suggested that it is controlled to an advantageous state based on. When the chance effect is executed during the variable display, the rate of control to the advantageous state based on the variable display is higher than when the chance effect is not executed during the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the chance effect will be executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. The chance effect may be executed as the forewarning effect for notifying the degree of expectation of winning in the variable display being executed. When the variable display is executed while being controlled in the chance production up mode, it is controlled to a production mode different from the chance production up mode, such as the normal mode, the color display expectation level up mode, or the color display premium mode. The chance effect is executed during the variable display at a higher rate than when the variable display is executed while the variable display is on.

In addition, normal mode, color display expectation up mode, color display premier mode, even if it is controlled in any of the chance production up mode, the execution presence or absence of probability variation control (whether it is controlled to a high probability state) is mutually If they are the same, the probability (percentage) of being controlled in an advantageous state is the same. For example, when it is controlled in the normal state (low probability low base state), when it is controlled in normal mode, when it is controlled in color display expectation up mode, and when it is controlled in color display premier mode The probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same between when the player is in the state and when the chance effect-up mode is controlled.

In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the default mode is set to the normal mode. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process executed in step S71 of the effect control main process is set to control the normal mode. In the setting for controlling the normal mode, the normal mode flag described later is set to ON state, and the color display expectation level up mode flag, color display premier mode, and chance production mode flag are all cleared and turned OFF. is set to Further, in the setting for controlling to the normal mode, if the setting for starting the mode notification for notifying that the normal mode is controlled in the mode display area 07AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed. good. It should be noted that this is only an example, and the player may be configured to be able to select the presentation mode at the start of the game based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on.

The characteristic part 007AK is configured so that the effect mode can be switched based on the player's operation. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3, as an operation means (detection means capable of detecting the operation by the player) that can be operated by the player A cross key 33 is provided, and based on the operation of the cross key 33 by the player, the effect mode after switching (the effect mode after switching) can be selected.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine is placed at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 34 is provided to hold (store) the shot ball so as to be supplied to the shooting device, and the cross key 33 is provided adjacent to the batted ball supply tray 34 . The cross key 33 has four direction keys: a downward key 33A for downward, a leftward key 33B for leftward, an upward key 33C for upward, and a rightward key 33D for rightward. By pressing any one of these four direction keys, the player can select (designate) the direction corresponding to the pressed direction key out of the four directions of up, down, left, and right. can be done. Pressing operations on the downward key 33A, the leftward key 33B, the upward key 33C, and the rightward key 33D are performed by a cross key sensor (not shown) provided inside the main body of the game machine frame 3 at the position where the cross key 33 is installed. ), and the cross key sensor transmits (outputs) an operation detection signal indicating the detection result to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). In the present embodiment, each time a player performs a mode switching operation that is a pressing operation on the downward key 33A (every time a pressing operation on the downward key 33A is detected by the cross key sensor), the effect mode after switching is performed. , is configured to be switched in the order of normal mode->color display expectation increase mode->color display premier mode->chance effect increase mode. If the player performs a mode switching operation on the cross key 33 (pressing operation on the down key 33A) while the chance effect up mode is selected, the normal mode is selected. Hereinafter, switching of the selected production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7.

FIG. 8-7(A) shows a state in which the normal mode is selected, and FIG. 8-7(B) shows a state in which the color display expectation increase mode is selected. -7(C) shows a state in which the color display premier mode is selected, and FIG. 8-7(D) shows a state in which the chance effect up mode is selected. In the present embodiment, in the mode display area 07AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, it is configured to be able to execute selection mode notification for notifying which production mode is currently selected as the production mode after switching. It is In the selected mode notification, a frame image may be displayed in the mode display area 07AKC1, and the effect mode currently selected in the frame image may be notified. In the state shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the selection mode notification for notifying that the normal mode is selected is performed in the mode display area 07AKC1. In the state shown in FIG. 8-7(B), the mode display area 07AKC1 provides selection mode notification to notify that the color display expectation degree increasing mode is selected. In the state shown in FIG. 8-7(C), the mode display area 07AKC1 is informing that the color display premier mode is selected. In the state shown in FIG. 8-7(D), the mode display area 07AKC1 provides selection mode notification that the chance effect up mode is selected.

In the state where the normal mode shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is selected, the mode switching operation is performed by the player on the cross key 33 (the mode switching operation is detected by the cross key sensor). 8-7(B), the color display expectation level up mode is selected. 8-7 (C ) in which the color display premier mode is selected. In the state where the display premium mode shown in FIG. 8-7(C) is selected, based on the mode switching operation performed by the player on the cross key 33, the display shown in FIG. 8-7(D) A transition is made to a state in which the chance production up mode is selected. In this way, every time the player performs the mode switching operation on the cross key 33, the state in which the normal mode shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is selected→the color shown in FIG. 8-7(B) The state in which the display expectation level increasing mode is selected→the state in which the color display premium mode shown in FIG. 8-7(C) is selected→the chance effect increasing mode shown in FIG. 8-7(D) is switched in this order. 8-7(A) based on the mode switching operation performed by the player on the cross key 33 in the state where the chance effect up mode shown in FIG. 8-7(D) is selected. transition to the state in which the indicated normal mode is selected.

Each time the player presses the upward key 33C (every time the cross key sensor detects the pressing operation of the upward key 33C), the effect mode selected as the post-switching effect mode is The mode may be switched in the reverse order of the mode switching operation, which is the operation of pressing down key 33A by the player. That is, each time the player presses the upward key 33C, the effect mode selected as the effect mode after switching changes from the chance effect up mode→color display premium mode→color display expectation level up mode→normal. It may be configured to switch in order of mode. In this case, if the player presses the up direction key 33C while the normal mode is selected, the state may be returned to the state where the chance effect up mode is selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the selection of the desired effect mode by the player and improve the convenience.

In the characteristic part 007AK, after the mode switching operation is performed by the player on the cross key 33 and one effect mode is selected as the effect mode after switching, a new mode switching operation is not performed ( Based on the elapse of a predetermined mode switching confirmation time (for example, 3 seconds) without the mode switching operation being detected by the cross key sensor, the production mode selected at that time is switched. It is configured such that the subsequent performance mode is determined (determined), the switching to the one performance mode is determined, and the switching to the one performance mode is reserved (suspended). After that, when a predetermined condition is established, the effect mode is switched to the one effect mode (controlled).

Specifically, after one production mode is selected as the production mode after switching by performing a mode switching operation on the cross key 33 in a state where the hold information is not stored, a new mode switching operation is performed. When the one production mode is confirmed as the production mode after switching based on the fact that the mode switching confirmation time has passed without being performed, the next variable display (new variable display) based on the occurrence of a new start winning is started, the effect mode is switched to the one effect mode. Further, in a state where one or a plurality of pending information are stored, a mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33, so that one production mode is selected as the production mode after switching, and then a new mode switching operation is performed. If the one production mode is confirmed as the production mode after switching based on the fact that the mode switching confirmation time has passed without being performed, it corresponds to the hold information that was stored at the time the mode switching operation was performed. After the end of the variable display, the performance mode is switched to the one performance mode based on the start of the next variable display (new variable display) based on the occurrence of a new start winning.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the degree of expectation for winning when the color-based display effect is executed differs depending on which effect mode is being controlled. For this reason, before and after the switching of the presentation mode, the degree of expectation for winning the color-based display presentation may change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed (reserved) based on the mode switching operation performed in a state where one or more pending information is stored, the mode switching operation is performed After the variable display corresponding to the hold information memorized at the point in time is ended, the presentation mode is switched based on the start of the next variable display based on the occurrence of a new start winning. , it is expected that the color-based display effect will target the corresponding display corresponding to the pending information that was already started at the time the mode switching operation was performed and that was stored at the time the mode switching operation was performed. This prevents the player from being confused and losing interest in the game due to the fact that the degree is changed in the middle due to the switching of the performance mode based on the mode switching operation.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the production mode after switching is the normal mode, the color display expectation mode, the color display premier mode, or the chance production mode, the timing of switching the production mode is common. This is the timing (the timing at which the next variable display is started). That is, in the present embodiment, the production mode after switching is a chance production up mode related to the chance production as the advance notice production, and the production mode after switching is the corresponding display production as the pre-reading advance notice production. The timing at which the effect mode is switched is common to the color display expectation increase mode and the color display premier mode related to . With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the program relating to the switching of the production mode.

As described above, the characterizing portion 007AK is configured such that the effect mode can be switched based on the mode switching operation as the selection operation performed by the player on the cross key 33 as the operation means. For example, the characteristic portion 007AK is configured to be controllable from the normal mode to the color display expectation degree increasing mode based on the mode switching operation performed by the player on the cross key 33 . According to such a configuration, it is possible to set the production mode (production state) according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched based on the mode switching operation performed by the player on the cross key 33, but this is only an example, and the effect mode can be changed arbitrarily. can be switched based on the occurrence of For example, the effect mode may be switched based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous due to the game being played for a long period of time in the same effect mode, thereby preventing the game from becoming less interesting. Alternatively, each time the variable display is executed, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to switch the effect mode, and the effect mode may be switched based on winning the lottery. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the performance mode can be switched based on the result of the lottery, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. Alternatively, when the super reach effect is executed during the execution of the variable display and the display result of the variable display is "losing", the effect mode is changed when the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display. may be configured to switch between According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the display result of the variable display is "lost" despite the execution of the super ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of winning.

It should be noted that the effect mode may be switched during a predetermined mode switching period, while the effect mode may not be switched during a period different from the mode switching period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to frequent switching of the production state (production mode). For example, when the variable display is not being executed, a customer waiting demonstration effect for displaying a predetermined demonstration image on the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed, and the variable display as the mode switching period can be executed. While the production mode can be switched during the period in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed without being executed, the period during which the variable display is being executed, the variable display is not being executed, and the The production mode may not be switched during a period different from the mode switching period, such as a period during which the customer waiting demonstration production is not executed.

In this case, the mode display area 07AKC1 may be configured to be able to display a restriction display indicating that the presentation mode cannot be switched during a period different from the mode switching period during which the presentation mode cannot be switched. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's confusion and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Of the normal mode, color display expectation mode, color display premier mode, and chance production mode, some production modes can always be switched, while other production modes can only be switched during a predetermined customization period. may be configured to be One production mode can be switched refers to a state in which it is possible to switch from the one production mode to another production mode, or to switch from another production mode to the one production mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to frequent switching of the production state (production mode). Note that the customization period is preferably a period during which variable display is not performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the variable display from being hindered by the production related to the switching of the production mode, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game. For example, the normal mode and the chance production up mode, which is a production mode related to the chance production as the advance notice production, can always be switched (the customization period and the period different from the customization period can be switched). On the other hand, in production modes related to color-based display effects as pre-reading preview effects, such as the color display expectation level up mode and the color display premier mode, the variable display is not executed and the customer waiting demo effect is executed. It may be configured such that switching is possible only during a customization period such as a period or a period during which the jackpot game state is controlled.

In the characteristic portion 007AK, when the mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33 and the switching to the production mode is confirmed, in the mode display area 07AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, It is configured to be able to execute mode switching notification for notifying that the effect mode is switched. In the mode switching notification, it is sufficient if it is notified that the effect mode after switching is controlled. In the present embodiment, the mode switching notification is executed until a predetermined mode switching notification time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the switching to the production mode is confirmed.

In the characteristic part 007AK, in a predetermined period after notifying that one production mode is switched to another production mode (controlled) by the mode switching notification, the production mode after switching is displayed in the mode display area 07AKC1. It is configured to be able to display a mode switching preparation display suggesting that the other production mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect mode after switching is controlled based on the mode switching preparation display. For example, in a predetermined period after the mode switching notification indicates that the normal mode will be controlled to the increased color display expectation mode, a mode switching preparing display indicating that the mode will be controlled to the increased color display expectation mode is displayed. configured as possible. In the mode switching preparation display as the switching suggestion display, it is sufficient to notify that switching to the production mode after switching is on standby (suspended).

In the present embodiment, the degree of hit expectation for the color-based display effect changes before and after the effect mode is switched (the expected degree of hit for the color-based display effect in the effect mode before switching and the color-based display effect in the effect mode after switching). It is configured to be able to display the display during preparation for mode switching when the degree of expectation for the performance and the degree of expectation for the performance are different from each other. That is, the production mode after switching is a production mode different from the production mode before switching, and at least one of the production mode before switching and the production mode after switching is the color display expectation level increasing mode or the color display In the premier mode, it is configured to be able to display the display during preparation for mode switching. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is no change in the expected win rate of the color-based display effect before and after the switching of the effect mode (the expected win rate of the color-based display effect in the effect mode before switching and the color value in the effect mode after switching). When the expected degree of winning of the corresponding display effect is the same, the display during preparation for mode switching is not displayed. That is, when the production mode before switching is one of the normal mode and the chance production up mode, and the production mode after switching is the other production mode of the normal mode and the chance production up mode. , the mode switching preparation in progress display is not displayed. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the hit expectation degree of the effect corresponding to the color display changes due to the switching of the effect mode, based on the display of the mode switching preparation in progress display.

In this embodiment, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 while the variable display is being performed in a state where the pending information is not stored, a predetermined period During the period from the termination of the mode switching notification to the termination of the variable display, the mode switching preparing display is displayed. On the other hand, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 while the variable display is being executed in the state where the pending information is stored, the predetermined period is After the end of the mode switching notification, after the end of the variable display, until the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored when the mode switching operation was performed, the mode switching preparation display is displayed. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 when the variable display is not executed, the mode switching preparing display is not displayed.

The characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to restrict the switching of the effect mode, for example, the control to the color display expectation increasing mode during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to frequent switching of the production mode (production state). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the mode switching operation is detected during the period from when the effect mode switching is confirmed to when the effect mode is switched, including the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. By setting as an invalid period that is first invalid, it is restricted so that the switching of the production mode is not performed based on the mode switching operation performed during the period. It should be noted that this is only an example, and includes a predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. The confirmation of the switching of the performance mode may be suspended (standby) until the end of the relevant period, and the switching of the performance mode based on the mode switching operation may be fixed (reserved) after the end of the relevant period. In addition, during the period from the confirmation of the switching of the production mode until the switching of the production mode, the switching of the production mode is not restricted during the period other than the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. You may

Hereinafter, execution timings of various effects related to switching of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8-8. FIG. 8-8(A) shows the degree of color display expectation from the normal mode based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 while the variable display is being executed in a state where the hold information is not stored. An example of switching to the up mode is shown. FIG. 8-8(B) shows color display from the normal mode based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 while the variable display is being executed in a state in which two pieces of hold information are stored. It shows an example of a case where the mode can be switched to the expectation-increasing mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the mode switching operation is performed with respect to the cross key 33 while the variable display is being performed in a state where the pending information is not stored. After the color display expectation level up mode is selected, switching to the color display expectation level up mode is confirmed based on the elapse of the mode switching determination time without the mode switching operation being performed. Based on the decision to switch to the color display expectation level up mode, mode switching notification for notifying that control is to be performed to the color display expectation level up mode is started, and the mode switching notification is issued after the mode switching notification time has elapsed. Terminate accordingly. When the mode switching notification ends, the display of the mode switching preparations indication that suggests that the color display expectation increase mode is controlled is started, and the display of the mode switching preparations indication is displayed when the mode switching operation is performed. It ends based on the fact that the variable display that was being executed at the time ended. After that, the performance mode is switched from the normal mode to the color display expectation increasing mode in response to the start of the next variable display based on the occurrence of a new starting prize. In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), after the switching of the production mode is confirmed, including the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the production based on the start of the next variable display A period until the mode is switched is an invalid period in which the mode switching operation is not detected and is invalid.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33 while the variable display is being executed in a state in which two pieces of hold information are stored. After the color display expectation level up mode is selected as the performance mode, the switching to the color display expectation level up mode is confirmed based on the elapse of the mode switching determination time without the mode switching operation being performed. Based on the decision to switch to the color display expectation level up mode, mode switching notification for notifying that control is to be performed to the color display expectation level up mode is started, and the mode switching notification is issued after the mode switching notification time has elapsed. Terminate accordingly. When the mode switching notification ends, the display of the mode switching preparations indication that suggests that the color display expectation increase mode is controlled is started, and the display of the mode switching preparations indication is displayed when the mode switching operation is performed. After the variable display that has been executed is completed, the variable display of the pending information ("holding 1st change", "holding 2nd change") that was stored when the mode switching operation was performed Terminate based on what has finished. After that, the performance mode is switched from the normal mode to the color display expectation increasing mode in response to the start of the next variable display based on the occurrence of a new starting prize. In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), after the switching of the production mode is confirmed, including the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the next variable after the variable display for the pending information is completed A period until the production mode is switched based on the start of display is an invalid period in which the mode switching operation is not detected and is invalid.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 8-9, the effect operation at the time of switching the effect mode will be described. Specifically, referring to FIGS. 8-9 below, normal A description will be given of the rendering operation when switching from the mode to the color display expectation degree increasing mode.

In FIG. 8-9(A), variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a state where no pending information is stored. This indicates that the In the state shown in FIG. 8-9(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the normal mode, and the mode notification for notifying that it is controlled in the normal mode is performed. In the mode notification, a message "normal mode" is displayed in the mode display area 07AKC1. In the mode notification, the frame image is not displayed, and the message indicating the currently controlled production mode is displayed in a smaller font size than when the selected mode notification, mode switching notification, mode switching preparation display, etc. are being performed. be done.

A case where the player performs a mode switching operation on the cross key 33 in the state shown in FIG. 8-9(A) will be described below as an example. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 8-9(A) transitions to the state shown in FIG. 8-9(B) in which the color display expectation degree increasing mode is selected as the effect mode after switching. In the state shown in FIG. 8-9(B), the selection mode notification is performed to notify that the color display expectation degree increasing mode is selected as the effect mode after switching. In the selected mode notification, a frame image is displayed in the mode display area 07AKC1, and a message "color display expectation level up mode" is displayed in the frame image. In the selected mode notification, the message is displayed in a larger character size than when the mode notification is performed. According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the selected production mode.

In the following, an example will be described in which the mode switching confirmation time elapses without the cross key 33 being operated to switch the mode. In this case, the transition to the state shown in FIG. 8-9(C) is made, in which the switching to the color display expectation level up mode is confirmed. In the state shown in FIG. 8-9(C), the mode switching notification for notifying that the color display expectation degree increasing mode is selected is performed. In the mode switching notification, the frame image in the mode display area 07AKC1 is emphasized in a luminous display mode, which is a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than when the selected mode notification or the mode switching preparation display is being performed. , and a message "Change to color display expectation level up mode!" is displayed in the frame image. According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the effect mode is switched. Note that this is only an example, and in the mode switching notification, the frame image may be highlighted in an arbitrary display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than when the selected mode notification or mode switching preparation display is being performed. can be done. For example, in the mode switching notification, the frame image may be emphasized by displaying it in a larger size than when the selected mode notification or the mode switching preparation display is being performed.

In FIG. 8-9 (D), the mode switching notification is completed based on the elapse of the mode switching notification time, and the mode switching preparation display indicating that the color display expectation increase mode is controlled is displayed. indicates a state in which the In the mode switching preparations display, a message "Preparing for color display expectation increasing mode" is displayed in the frame image in the mode display area 07AKC1. In FIG. 8-9 (E), when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the missing patterns (" 265”) is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 8-9(F) shows variable display of decorative patterns ( The following variable display) is being executed. In the state shown in FIG. 8-9 (F), the production mode is switched from the normal mode to the color display expectation level up mode in response to the start of the next variable display, and the color display expectation level up mode is entered. A mode notification is performed to notify that it is being controlled. In the mode display area 07AKC1, the frame image is erased based on the start of the mode notification, and the message "color display expectation increase mode" is displayed such as selection mode notification, mode switching notification, mode switching preparation display, etc. is displayed in a smaller font size than when

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of the effect control main process as the effect control process process regarding the feature part 007AK. The effect control process shown in the flow charts of FIGS. 8-10 may be executed in step S76 of the effect main process instead of the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIG.

In the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIGS. 8-10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a mode switching process (step 07AKS101). In the mode switching process, it is determined whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed with respect to the cross key 33, and based on the determination that the mode switching operation has been performed, a mode for reserving (standby) switching of the production mode. Along with the switching reservation setting is performed, the setting for executing the effect related to the switching of the effect mode, such as mode switching notification and mode switching preparation display, is performed.

After executing the process of step 07AKS101, the effect control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, it is determined whether or not a new starting prize has occurred, and based on the determination that a new starting prize has occurred, the corresponding display is targeted for the variable display based on the starting prize. Settings are made for executing pre-reading notice effects such as effects, winning flash effects, and background change effects.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 executes the corresponding display related effect process (step 07AKS102). In the corresponding display related effect processing, settings for executing the corresponding display lamp effect and settings for executing the premium effect are performed. After executing the process of step 07AKS102, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag.

FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 07AKS101 of the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIG.

When the mode switching process is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a mode switching reservation setting flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, is set to the ON state, thereby switching the production mode. (step 07AKS201). The mode switching reservation setting flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the mode switching reservation setting is performed.

If it is determined that the mode switching reservation setting is performed (the mode switching reservation setting flag is set to ON state) (step 07AKS201; Yes), the process proceeds to step 07AKS218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode switching reservation setting is not performed (the mode switching reservation setting flag is set to OFF state) (step 07AKS201; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the operation transmitted from the cross key sensor. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed on the cross key 33 (step 07AKS202).

When it is determined that the mode switching operation has been performed on the cross key 33 (step 07AKS202; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode after switching, and the effect provided on the screen of the image display device 5 In the mode display area 07AKC1, mode selection setting for executing selection mode notification for notifying the selected effect mode after switching is performed (step 07AKS203). In step 07AKS203, if the presently controlled (selected) effect mode is the normal mode, the color display expectation level up mode is selected as the effect mode after switching, and the presently controlled effect mode is the color display expectation level up mode. mode, the color display premier mode is selected as the production mode after switching, and if the currently controlled production mode is the color display premier mode, the chance production up mode is selected as the production mode after switching, and the current If the production mode being controlled is the chance production up mode, the normal mode is selected as the production mode after switching.

In this embodiment, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is provided with a normal mode flag, a color display expectation level up mode flag, a color display premier mode flag, and a chance effect up mode flag. The normal mode flag is a flag that is set to ON when the normal mode is controlled. The color display expectation level up mode is a flag that is set to an ON state when control is being performed in the color display expectation level up mode. The color display premier mode is a flag that is set to the ON state when the color display premier mode is controlled. The chance effect up mode flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the chance effect up mode is controlled. In the process of step 07AKS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the normal mode to the chance effect up mode is currently being controlled based on which of the normal mode flag to the chance effect up mode flag is set to the ON state. should be specified. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting to control the normal mode as default is performed, the normal mode flag is set to ON state At the same time, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance effect up mode flag are cleared and set to the off state.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode switching confirmation time elapsed wait setting flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, is set to the ON state. It is determined whether or not the setting for waiting for the elapse of the mode switching determination time after the mode switching operation is performed on the key 33 is performed (step 07AKS204). The mode switching fixed time waiting setting flag is a flag that is set to ON when the mode switching fixed time waiting setting is performed.

When it is determined that the mode switching fixed time waiting setting is not performed (the mode switching fixed time waiting setting flag is set to OFF state) (step 07AKS204; No), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the effect process By determining whether or not the value of the flag is "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display, it is possible to determine whether variable display such as a special game or variable display of decorative patterns is being executed. Determine (step 07AKS205). When it is determined that the variable display is being executed (the value of the production process flag is "2") (step 07AKS205; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays a variable display provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. A mode switching operation flag is set to ON (step 07AKS206). The mode switching operation flag during variable display is a flag that is set to an ON state when a mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33 while variable display is being performed.

After executing the process of step 07AKS206 or when it is determined that the variable display is not being executed (the value of the production process flag is not "2") in step 07AKS205 (step 07AKS205; No), the production control CPU 120 , mode switching determination time elapsing waiting setting is performed (step 07AKS207). In the process of step 07AKS207, the effect control CPU120 sets the mode switching fixed time waiting setting flag to ON state, and mode switching which is a stored value of the mode switching fixed time timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM122 for example A fixed time timer value is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined mode switching fixed time. The mode switching fixed time timer is a timer that measures the remaining time from when the cross key 33 is operated for mode switching until the mode switching fixed time elapses.

After executing the process of step 07AKS207, the effect control CPU120 is the mode switching operation time pending residual number count value, which is the stored value of the mode switching operation time pending residual number counter provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM122. (step 07AKS208), and terminates the mode switching process. The mode switching operation pending residual number counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining variable displays corresponding to the stored pending information when the mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33 . At step 07 AKS 208, if the current total pending storage number is 0, the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is set to "0". The total number of reserved memories may be specified, for example, based on a total reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 and described later.

In step 07AKS204, when it is determined that the mode switching fixed time waiting setting is performed (the mode switching fixed time waiting setting flag is set to ON state) (step 07AKS204; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 , and determines whether or not the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to the ON state (step 07AKS209). If it is determined that the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to the ON state (step 07AKS209; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching operation flag during variable display and sets it to the OFF state (step 07AKS210).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS210 or when it is determined that the mode switching operation flag during variable display is not set to the ON state in step 07AKS209 (step 07AKS209; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the mode switching fixed time. Elapsed waiting setting is erased (step 07AKS211). In the processing of step 07AKS211, the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching fixed time waiting setting flag and sets it to the OFF state, clears the mode switching fixed time timer, and sets the mode switching fixed time timer value to "0". set to After executing the processing of step 07AKS211, the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching operation pending residual number counter, sets the mode switching operation pending residual number count value to "0" (step 07AKS212), and mode switching. End the process.

In step 07AKS202, when it is determined that the mode switching operation is not performed on the cross key 33 (step 07AKS202; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode switching confirmation time elapsed wait setting flag to the ON state. By determining whether or not there is, it is determined whether or not the setting for waiting for the mode switching determination time to elapse has been performed (step 07AKS213). If it is determined that the setting for waiting for the mode switching fixed time to elapse has not been performed (step 07AKS213; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode switching process.

When it is determined that the mode switching confirmation time elapse waiting setting is performed (step 07AKS213; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the mode switching confirmation time after the mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33. (step 07AKS214). In the processing of step 07 AKS214, the effect control CPU 120 updates the mode switching fixed time timer value by, for example, subtracting 1, and determines whether the updated mode switching fixed time timer value is "0". Thus, it is determined whether or not the mode switching determination time has passed since the mode switching operation was performed. When it is determined that the mode switching fixed time has not elapsed since the mode switching operation was performed (the mode switching fixed time timer value is not "0") (step 07AKS214; No), the effect control CPU 120 switches the mode. End the process.

When it is determined that the mode switching fixed time has elapsed since the mode switching operation was performed (the mode switching fixed time timer value is "0") (step 07AKS214; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the mode switching fixed time Elapsed waiting setting is erased (step 07AKS215). In the processing of step 07 AKS215, the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching fixed time lapse wait setting flag and sets it to the OFF state.

After executing the processing of step 07 AKS215, the production control CPU 120 performs mode switching reservation setting for reserving switching to the production mode currently selected as the production mode after switching, thereby switching to the production mode. Confirm (step 07AKS216). In the process of step 07AKS216, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode switching reservation setting flag to the ON state, and stores data indicating the effect mode after switching in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. Remember mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in response to the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 (step 07AKS202; Yes), the mode switching determination time wait setting is performed (step 07AKS207). Based on the fact that the mode switching confirmation time has passed without a new mode switching operation being performed (step 07AKS214; Yes), the mode switching reservation setting for reserving the switching of the production mode is performed, and the switching of the production mode is confirmed. (Step 07AKS216).

After the mode switching operation is performed on the cross key 33, when the mode switching confirmation time has passed without a new mode switching operation being performed (step 07AKS214; Yes), the presently controlled production mode It is determined whether or not the production mode before switching and the production mode after switching are the same production mode, and if the production mode before switching and the production mode after switching are different production modes , While the mode switching reservation setting is performed, when the performance mode before switching and the performance mode after switching are the same performance mode, the mode switching reservation setting is not performed and the switching of the performance mode is not performed. You may According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing interest in the game due to the mode switching notification being performed even though the performance mode does not change before and after the switching of the performance mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the mode switching reservation setting is not performed (step 07AKS201; No), it is determined whether or not the mode switching operation has been performed with the cross key 33 (step 07AKS202). Then, when it is determined that the mode switching operation has been performed (step 07AKS202; Yes), the mode switching determination time wait setting is performed (step 07AKS207), and then the mode switching operation is newly performed. Mode switching reservation setting is performed (step 07AKS216) based on the fact that the mode switching confirmation time has passed without being switched (step 07AKS214; Yes), and the switching of the effect mode is confirmed. On the other hand, when the mode switching reservation setting is performed (step 07AKS201; Yes), it is not determined whether or not the mode switching operation has been performed in step 07AKS202, and the mode switching reservation setting based on the mode switching operation is also performed. can't break As will be described later, the mode switching reservation setting is erased (step 07AKS604) in response to the mode switching setting for executing the switching of the reserved effect mode (step 07AKS605). Thus, in the present embodiment, mode switching reservation setting is performed, the period from the determination of the switching of the production mode (step 07AKS216) to the production mode is switched (step 07AKS605) is the mode switching operation is set as an invalid period during which the mode switching operation is not detected and is invalid. With such a configuration, the production mode is changed based on the mode switching operation performed during the period from when the production mode switching is confirmed until the production mode is switched, including the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. Restricted to prevent switching.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the mode switching reservation is set (step 07AKS201), and if it is determined that the mode switching reservation is set (step 07AKS201; No ), and by not determining whether or not the mode switching operation has been performed in step 07AKS202, the description will be made as limiting the switching of the presentation mode based on the mode switching operation. is just an example. It is first determined whether or not a mode switching operation has been performed, and if it is determined that the mode switching operation has been performed by the determination, it is determined whether or not a mode switching reservation setting has been performed, and the mode switching reservation is performed. When it is determined that the setting is performed, by determining not to switch the presentation mode based on the mode switching operation, the switching of the presentation mode based on the mode switching operation is restricted so as not to be performed. good too.

After executing the process of step 07AKS216, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting mode switching notification for notifying that the effect mode after switching is controlled in the mode display area 07AKC1 (step 07AKS217), and mode switching. End the process. In the process of step 07 AKS217, the effect control CPU 120 sets a mode switching notification flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, to the ON state. The mode switching notification flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the mode switching notification is being executed. In addition, in the processing of step 07AKS217, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode switching notification time timer value, which is the stored value of the mode switching notification time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, to the predetermined mode switching notification time. set to the desired value. The mode switching notification time timer is a timer that measures the remaining time from when the mode switching notification is started until the mode switching notification time elapses.

Moving to FIG. 8-12, in step 07AKS218, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode switching notification flag is set to the ON state, thereby determining whether or not the mode switching notification is being executed. (Step 07AKS218). When it is determined that the mode switching notification is not executed (the mode switching notification flag is set to OFF state) (step 07AKS218; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode switching process.

When it is determined that the mode switching notification is being executed (the mode switching notification flag is set to the ON state) (step 07AKS218; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 starts the mode switching notification after the mode switching notification is started. It is determined whether or not time has passed (step 07AKS219). In the process of step 07 AKS219, the effect control CPU 120 updates the mode switching notification time timer value by, for example, subtracting 1, and determines whether the updated mode switching notification time timer is "0". determines whether or not the mode switching notification time has elapsed since the mode switching notification was started. When it is determined that the mode switching notification time has not elapsed since the mode switching notification was started (the mode switching notification time timer value is not "0") (step 07AKS219; No), the effect control CPU 120 switches the mode. End the process.

When it is determined that the mode switching notification time has passed (the mode switching notification time timer value is "0") (step 07AKS219; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the mode switching confirmation notification (step 07AKS220). In the process of step 07AKS220, the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching notification flag and sets it to the OFF state.

After executing the processing of step 07 AKS220, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode before switching (currently controlled effect mode) and the effect mode after switching are the same effect mode (step 07AKS221). The effect mode before switching may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag to the chance effect up mode flag is set to the ON state. The effect mode after switching should just be specified by referring to the data memorize|stored in the predetermined area|region of RAM122. If it is determined that the effect mode before switching and the effect mode after switching are the same effect mode (step 07AKS221; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode switching process.

When it is determined that the effect mode before switching and the effect mode after switching are different effect modes (step 07AKS221; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to the ON state. It is determined whether or not (step 07AKS222). When it is determined that the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to the OFF state (step 07AKS222; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the mode switching process.

If it is determined that the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to ON state (step 07AKS222; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching operation flag during variable display and sets it to OFF state (step 07AKS223), and it is determined whether or not the effect mode before switching is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode (step 07AKS224). When it is determined that the effect mode before switching is neither the color display expectation degree increasing mode nor the color display premier mode (step 07AKS224; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the effect mode after switching is the color display expectation mode. It is determined whether or not it is the degree-up mode or the color display premier mode (step 07AKS225). When it is determined that the effect mode after switching is neither the color display expectation level up mode nor the color display premier mode (step 07AKS225; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode switching process.

In step 07AKS224, if it is determined that the effect mode before switching is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode (step 07AKS224; Yes), or in step 07AKS225, the effect mode after switching is the color display expectation level up mode. If it is determined to be mode or color display premier mode (step 07AKS225; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, in the mode display area 07AKC1, the mode switching preparation display suggesting that it will be controlled to the after-switching effect mode. The setting for starting display is made (step 07AKS226), and the mode switching process ends. In the process of step 07AKS226, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode switching preparation display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, to the ON state. The mode-switching-preparing display is a flag that is turned on when the mode-switching-preparing display is displayed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect mode before switching and the effect mode after switching are different effect modes (step 07AKS221; No), and at least one of the effect mode before switching and the effect mode after switching is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode (step 07AKS224; Yes or step 07AKS225; Yes), it is configured to be able to display the mode switching preparation display (step 07AKS226). On the other hand, if the production mode before switching is one of the normal mode and the chance production up mode, and the production mode after switching is the other production mode of the normal mode and the chance production up mode (step 07AKS225; No), the display of preparing for mode switching is not displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the mode switching operation flag during variable display is set to OFF (step 07AKS222; No), the mode switching preparing display is not displayed. With such a configuration, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed on the cross key 33 when the variable display is not executed, the mode switching preparing display is not displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode before switching and the effect mode after switching are the same effect mode (step 07AKS221; Yes), the display during preparation for mode switching is not displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the display during mode preparation switching when the performance mode does not change before and after the switching of the performance mode, and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. .

FIG. 8-13 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of the effect control process processing shown in the flow chart of FIG.

In the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, transmission for transmitting a starting opening winning designation command as an effect control command for notifying (designating) establishment of starting conditions based on the occurrence of starting winning Settings are made. In addition, in the starting winning determination process, transmission setting for transmitting a pending memory count notification command as an effect control command for notifying (designating) the pending memory count is performed. Furthermore, in the starting winning determination process, transmission setting for transmitting a winning determination result command as an effect control command for notifying (designating) the determination result of the prefetch determination is performed.

The starting opening winning designation command includes the first starting opening winning designation command as an effect control command that notifies the establishment of the first starting condition, and the second starting opening winning designation as the effect control command that notifies the establishment of the second starting condition. Contains commands and . The reserved storage number notification command includes a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first reserved storage number, a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second reserved storage number, and a total reserved storage number for notifying the total reserved storage number. and a memory count notification command. The prize-winning determination result command is a production control command that notifies the prize-winning determination result that the variable display result of the special game is determined to be "losing" and the control is not in an advantageous state, and the variable display of the special game. It includes an effect control command for notifying the determination result at the time of winning that the result is determined to be a "big win" or a "minor win" to be controlled in an advantageous state.

When the first starting condition is established due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize, the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the first start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, the total pending storage number notification command, and A start winning command is transmitted (transmitted) with the first reserved memory number notification command as one set. When the second starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning, the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the second starting opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, total pending memory number notification command, and A start winning command is transmitted (transmitted) with the second pending memory number notification command as one set.

In the command analysis process executed in step S75 of the production control main process, the first start winning designation command, the winning determination result command, the total pending memory number notification command, and the first pending memory number notification as the start winning command. When a command is received, among the free areas in the first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, the storage area with the smallest pending display number, which is the buffer number, is received as a start winning command. The first start opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, total reserved memory number notification command, and first reserved memory number notification command are stored in order. In addition, in the command analysis process, when a second start winning designation command, a winning decision result command, a total reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are received as a start winning command, a predetermined value of the RAM 122 Among the empty areas in the second start winning command buffer provided in the area etc., in the storage area with the smallest pending display number that will be the buffer number, the second start winning designation command received as the start winning command, winning A time determination result command, a total pending storage number notification command, and a second pending storage number notification command are stored in order.

In the first start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (first start winning designation command and winning determination result command, total A storage area is provided so that the reserved storage number notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command) can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120, according to the reception order, the effect control command received as the start winning command when the first start winning occurs, the reservation display number "1" to "4" of the first start winning command buffer. are stored in order from the top of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to . The pending display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to the first pending memory number. In the second start winning command buffer, one set of effect control commands (second start winning designation command and winning determination result command, total A storage area is provided so that the reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command) can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120, according to the reception order, the effect control command received as the command at the time of start winning when the second start winning occurs, the pending display number "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. are stored in order from the top of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to . The pending display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second pending memory number.

When the pre-reading notice setting process shown in the flow chart of FIG. 8-13 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step 07AKS301). The starting winning command includes a starting opening winning designation command, a pending memory count notification command, and a winning determination result command. In the process of step 07 AKS301, the effect control CPU 120 newly adds a starting entry winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a pending storage number notification command to, for example, the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. By confirming whether or not it is stored, it is possible to determine whether or not the command has been received at the time of starting winning.

If it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step 07AKS301; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the pre-reading notice setting process. When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step 07AKS301; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the content of notification by the received start winning command (step 07AKS302). In the processing of step 07AKS302, the effect control CPU 120 specifies, for example, the winning judgment result as the content of notification by the winning judgment result command.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS302, the effect control CPU 120 executes corresponding display effect setting processing (step 07AKS303). In the corresponding display effect setting process, whether or not to execute the color corresponding display effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning command received in step 07AKS301, and the final display mode ("white") of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display are determined. , “blue”, “green”, “red”) are determined. Furthermore, in the corresponding display effect setting process, execution/non-execution and type of pending display effect (color pending display effect, red character pending display effect, white character pending display display effect) is determined. In the corresponding display effect setting process, in response to the determination to execute the pending display effect, a pending change pattern designating a change (transition) of the display mode of the pending display due to the change in the pending display in the pending display effect; A pending change timing pattern that designates execution timing of the pending display change in the pending display effect (change timing of the display mode of the pending display) is determined. Furthermore, in the corresponding display setting effect, it is decided to execute the character pending display effect (red character pending display effect, white character pending display effect) for the variable display corresponding to the start winning command received in step 07AKS301. Correspondingly, it is determined whether or not to execute the special character effect in the variable display. The determination result in the corresponding display effect setting process of step 07AKS303 is stored by storing suspension related data corresponding to the determination result in suspension related data storage section 07AKM1 provided in a predetermined area of RAM122.

FIG. 8-14 shows a configuration example of the hold-related data storage unit 07AKM1 regarding the feature unit 007AK. The reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1 stores various data related to the first special figure reservation information and various data related to the second special figure reservation information as the reservation related data. As a reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1, a first reservation related data storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation information related to the first special figure game, and a second reservation corresponding to the second special figure reservation information related to the second special figure game A related data storage unit may be provided. The reservation-related data storage unit 07AKM1 is provided with a storage area for storing data indicating the determination result at the time of winning so as to be associated with, for example, buffer numbers "0" to "4". The storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" stores hold-related data related to the variable display corresponding to the active display, which is the variable display being executed. The storage area corresponding to the buffer number "1" stores hold-related data related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the hold number "1". The storage area corresponding to the buffer number "2" stores hold-related data related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the hold number "2". The storage area corresponding to the buffer number "3" stores hold-related data related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the hold number "3". The storage area corresponding to the buffer number "4" stores hold-related data related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the hold number "4". Winning determination result that can be stored by the pending related data indicates the content of notification by the winning determination result command.

Further, in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1, in association with the buffer numbers "0" to "4", the current display mode of the correspondence display, the final display mode of the correspondence display, the execution/non-execution of the color correspondence display effect, the winning flash Execution/non-execution and type of effect (flash effect for weak winning, flash effect for strong winning), execution/non-execution of background change effect, pending change pattern, pending change timing pattern, display mode of active display due to active display change in active display effect Active change pattern that specifies change (transition), execution timing of active display change in active display effect (change timing of display mode of active display), execution presence or absence and type of special character effect (first special character effect, second special effect A storage area is provided for storing data indicating identifiable whether or not a character effect is executed, whether or not a premium effect is executed, and whether or not a corresponding display lamp effect is executed.

Execution/non-execution of color-based display effect, final display mode of corresponding display, pending change pattern, pending change timing pattern, execution/non-execution and type of special character effect, which can be stored by the hold-related data, are determined by the corresponding display effect setting process. is shown. Whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and the type of flash effect at the time of winning that can be stored by the pending related data indicates the result of determination by the process of step 07AKS306, which will be described later, in the pre-reading notice setting process. The presence or absence of execution of the background change effect that can be stored by the hold-related data indicates the result of determination by the process of step 07AKS310, which will be described later, in the pre-reading notice setting process. The active change pattern and the execution timing of the active display change that can be stored by the hold-related data indicate the result of determination by the processes of steps 07AKS612 and 07AKS613, which will be described later, in the variable display start setting process. In the present embodiment, the data indicating the one display mode is stored as the data indicating the current display mode of the corresponding display based on the start of the display of the corresponding display in the one display mode. It is stored in the part 07AKM1. Thereafter, every time the display mode of the corresponding display changes due to the pending display change or the active display change, the data representing the current display mode of the corresponding display is updated to the data representing the post-change display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, based on the execution (start) of the premium effect, the data corresponding to the execution of the premium effect is stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1 as data indicating whether or not the premium effect is to be executed. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the variable display targeted for the premium effect. Thus, it is possible to specify whether or not the premium effect is to be executed and the variable display for which the premium effect is to be performed, based on the reservation-related data. Further, in the present embodiment, the data corresponding to the execution of the corresponding display lamp effect is based on the fact that the corresponding display lamp effect is executed (started). It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the corresponding display lamp effect in the data storage unit 07AKM1. Accordingly, it is possible to specify whether or not the corresponding display lamp effect is executed and the variable display for which the corresponding display lamp effect is to be performed, based on the hold-related data.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, after executing the process of step 07AKS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not data corresponding to the execution of the winning flash effect is stored in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed (step 07AKS304). When it is determined that the winning flash effect is being executed (step 07AKS304; Yes), the process proceeds to step 07AKS309. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the win-time flash effect has already been executed for one variable display (step 07AKS304; Yes), a new win-time flash effect for another variable display is executed. No performance is performed. When it is determined that the winning flash effect is not executed (step 07AKS304; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not data corresponding to execution of the corresponding display lamp effect is stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. , it is determined whether or not the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed (step 07AKS305). If it is determined that the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed (step 07AKS305; Yes), the process proceeds to step 07AKS309. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed (step 07AKS305; Yes), the winning flash effect is not executed.

When it is determined that the corresponding display lamp effect is not being executed (step 07AKS305; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the winning flash effect determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether the display effect is executed, the currently controlled effect mode, and the result of the variable display, whether or not the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display corresponding to the start winning command received at step 07AKS301. and the type is determined (step 07AKS306). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AKS306, execution/non-execution of color-based display effect, currently controlled effect mode, variable display result, and Depending on the conditions, no flash effect will be executed when winning a prize, "no flash effect when winning a prize" is executed as a flash effect when winning a weak prize, and a flash effect when winning a strong prize is executed as a flash effect when winning a prize. It is determined to be one of the "flash effect at the time of strong prize winning". In the processing of step 07 AKS306, it is determined that the flash effect at the time of winning is executed by determining "flash effect at weak prize" or "flash effect at strong win", while it is determined to be "no execution". , it is determined not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning. The currently controlled production mode may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance production up mode flag is set to the ON state. . Whether or not the color-based display effect is executed may be specified based on the contents stored in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. The variable display result may be specified based on the winning determination result specified as the notification content of the start winning command in the process of step 07AKS302. In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" while being controlled in the color display premier mode, and the control is not in an advantageous state, the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed. , the decision percentage is not set.

In the prize-winning flash effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color-based display effect is executed ("executed"), the effect mode is the normal mode, the chance effect-up mode, the color display expectation level-up mode, and the color display. Even if it is controlled by any of the premier modes, when the variable display result is "hit", flashes at weak winnings at a rate higher than the rate at which it is decided not to execute flash effects at winning ("no execution") It is decided to execute the effect ("flash effect at weak win"), and the flash effect at strong win is executed at a rate higher than the ratio determined to execute the flash effect at weak win ("flash effect at strong win" ). On the other hand, when the color-based display effect is executed, even if the effect mode is controlled to any of the normal mode, the chance effect-up mode, and the color display expectation-increase mode, when the variable display result is "losing", It is decided to execute the flash effect for the weak prize at a rate higher than the ratio determined to execute the flash effect for the strong prize, and the flash effect for the winning prize is decided at a higher ratio than the ratio determined to execute the flash effect for the weak prize. Configured to decide not to run. With such a configuration, when the weak winning flash effect is executed, the rate of control in an advantageous state (win expectation) is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed, and the strong winning flash effect is executed. When executed, the rate of control in an advantageous state is higher than when the weak winning flash effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color-based display effect is executed, the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, and the winning flash effect is not executed when the variable display result is "win". ("No execution") is controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, and the ratio determined not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning when the variable display result is "win". higher than In other words, when the color-based display effect is executed, the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, and when the variable display result is "win", the flash effect at the time of winning is executed ("at the time of weak winning Flash effect" and "Strong win flash effect") are controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, and when the variable display result is "win", the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. The percentage determined is higher. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, control is performed in the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode, and when the variable display result is "win" and the control is in an advantageous state, the winning flash effect is executed. When the control is in the color display expectation increase mode and the variable display result is "win" and the control is in an advantageous state than when the winning flash effect is executed. The ratio of execution of display effects is high. According to such a configuration, the player can perform the color-based display effect, the winning flash effect, and the control to the advantageous state in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode. They can be recognized in association with each other, and the sense of anticipation when the winning flash effect is executed can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color-based display effect is executed, the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, and the winning flash effect is not executed when the variable display result is "loss". ("No execution") is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode, and the ratio determined not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning when the variable display result is "Loss" lower than In other words, when the color-based display effect is executed, it is controlled to the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode, and when the variable display result is "losing", the flash effect at the time of winning is executed ("at the time of weak winning Flash effect" and "flash effect at strong winning") are controlled in the color display expectation increase mode, and when the variable display result is "losing", the flash effect at winning is executed. Higher than the percentage determined then. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the control is performed in the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode, and when the variable display result is "losing" and the control is not in an advantageous state, the winning flash effect is executed. When it is controlled to the color display expectation increase mode, and the variable display result is "losing" and it is not controlled to an advantageous state, the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. is executed less frequently. According to such a configuration, the player can perform the color-based display effect, the winning flash effect, and the control to the advantageous state in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode. They can be recognized in association with each other, and the sense of anticipation when the winning flash effect is executed can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled and the color corresponding display effect is not executed, the ratio of execution of the strong win flash effect is set to 0%. It is restricted so that the flash effect is not executed at the time of a strong win. In this way, the characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to limit the execution of the flash effect at the time of a strong win when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled and the color corresponding display effect is not executed, the winning flash that can be executed for the variable display that is the object of the color corresponding display effect As a performance, the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state is higher than that of a flash performance for a weak winning. Although the flash performance for a strong winning is executed, it is not controlled to an advantageous state and the player's expectation is spoiled. It is possible to prevent this and improve the performance effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled and the color corresponding display effect is not executed, the rate at which the flash effect is executed at the time of weak winning is determined by the color display expectation increase mode. The ratio is the same as the ratio determined to execute the flash effect at the time of weak winning when the color corresponding display effect is executed when the mode is controlled. As described above, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning can be restricted, while the flash effect at the time of weak winning can be restricted. It is configured so as not to limit the execution of the production. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the execution of the flash effect at the time of a strong prize is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to an excessive decrease in the execution frequency (execution ratio) of the flash effect at the time of the prize winning. , it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, when the color correspondence display effect is not executed when the color display premier mode is controlled, when the color correspondence display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level up mode is controlled. is set to 0%, and the flash performance is restricted so as not to be executed. In addition, when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled and the color corresponding display effect is not executed, the flash effect at the time of weak winning can be executed, whereas when the color display premier mode is controlled When the color-based display effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the ratio of determination to execute the flash effect at weak winning is set to 0%, and the flash effect at weak winning is restricted so as not to be executed. be done. As described above, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the flash effect at the time of weak winning can be executed, and the color display premier mode is controlled. When the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed in the case where the player is in the low winning state, the flash effect can be restricted so as not to be executed. According to such a configuration, when the color display premier mode is controlled in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state when the color-based display effect is executed is higher than the color display expectation degree increasing mode, the player can Excessive expectations can be suppressed, and a decline in interest in games can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that execution/non-execution and type of the winning flash effect are determined based on the execution/non-execution of the color-based display effect, the effect mode, and the variable display result, but this is an example. After determining whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and the type of flash effect at the time of winning based on the effect mode and the variable display result, based on the effect mode, the variable display result, and the execution presence/absence and type of the flash effect at the time of winning It may be determined whether or not to execute the color correspondence display effect. In this case, the control is in the normal mode or the chance production up mode, and in the case of being controlled in an advantageous state, the control is in the color display expectation up mode, which is more advantageous than when the winning flash production is executed. When the state is controlled, the rate at which the color-based display effect is executed may be higher when the prize-winning flash effect is executed. In addition, it is controlled to the normal mode or the chance production up mode, and when it is not controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the color display expectation enhancement mode than when the flash production at the time of winning is executed, and is controlled to the advantageous state. When the winning flash effect is executed when it is not executed, the ratio of execution of the color-based display effect may be lower. According to such a configuration, the player can perform the color-based display effect, the winning flash effect, and the control to the advantageous state in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode. They can be recognized in association with each other, and the sense of anticipation when the winning flash effect is executed can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, when the color corresponding display effect is executed and controlled to be in an advantageous state, the corresponding display in the color corresponding display effect is displayed at a different rate depending on the final display mode. , it may be determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning. For example, when the color display effect is executed in a state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, and the effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the final display mode of the corresponding display in the color display effect is "blue". Sometimes, it may be decided to execute the win-time flash effect at a higher rate than when the final display mode of the corresponding display in the color-corresponding display effect is “green” or “red”. With such a configuration, the mode is controlled to increase the degree of expectation for color display, and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed in the advantageous state, the display corresponding to the color "blue" as the first mode is performed. The rate of execution of the effect is higher than that of the first mode, in which the rate of control in an advantageous state (expectation for winning) is higher than that of the first mode. higher than the rate According to such a configuration, when the color corresponding display effect (suggestive effect) is executed in the first mode in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is lower than in the second mode, the player's sense of expectation is maintained. , can improve the game interest.

After determining whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and the type of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the effect mode and the result of the variable display, color correspondence is performed based on the effect mode, the result of the variable display, and whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and the type of the effect. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the display effect and the final display mode. In this case, the color display expectation level up mode is controlled, and when the win-time flash effect is executed in the advantageous state, the rate at which the final display mode is determined to be "blue" is The final display mode may be configured to be higher than the ratio determined to be "green" or "red".

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the flash effect at the time of strong winning is not executed. is just an example. When the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level up mode is controlled, the flash at the time of strong winning is stronger than when the color display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increase mode is controlled. You may restrict|limit so that the execution frequency (execution ratio) of production|presentation may be reduced. That is, when the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the value is lower than when the color corresponding display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. In addition, it may be restricted to execute the flash effect at the time of strong winning at a rate higher than 0%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the execution frequency of the winning flash effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, when the color-based display effect is not executed in the color display expectation increasing mode, the execution of the strong winning flash effect can be restricted. Although described as not restricting the execution of , this is only an example. When the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning and the execution of the flash effect at the time of weak winning may be restricted. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Concretely, when the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, even if the strong winning flash effect and the weak winning flash effect are restricted from being executed. good.

When the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled, when the execution of the flash effect at the time of the strong winning and the execution of the flash effect at the time of the weak winning are both restricted, the strong The degree of restriction on the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning may be higher than the degree of restriction on the execution of the flash effect at the time of weak winning. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from having excessive expectations, suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and reduce the performance effect by excessively decreasing the execution frequency of the flash performance when winning. It is possible to suppress the decline of the game interest. Specifically, when the display effect corresponding to color is not executed when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled, the flash effect at the time of strong winning is restricted so as not to be executed, while the flash effect at weak winning is the color display. It may be restricted so that it is executed at a rate lower than when the color correspondence display effect is executed in the case of being controlled in the expectation level mode and higher than 0%.

In addition, when the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level increase mode is controlled, the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning is restricted, and the execution frequency of the flash effect at the time of weak winning is changed to the color display expectation level mode. It may be higher than when the color-based display effect is executed when the degree-up mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to an excessive decrease in the frequency of execution of the flash performance at the time of winning, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display premier mode is set, the flash effect at the time of weak winning is not executed, but this is an example. It's nothing more than When the color-based display effect is not executed under control in the color display premier mode, the execution frequency of the flash effect at the time of winning is weaker than when the color-based display effect is executed under control in the color display premier mode. You may restrict|limit so that (execution rate) may be lowered. That is, when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display premier mode is controlled, it is lower than when the color-based display effect is performed when the color display premier mode is controlled, and 0%. It may be restricted to execute the flash effect at the time of weak winning at a higher rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the execution frequency of the winning flash effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, after executing the processing of step 07AKS306, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step 07AKS306 to execute the winning flash effect (step 07AKS307). If it is determined that the winning flash effect is not to be executed (step 07AKS307; No), the process proceeds to step 07AKS309. When it is determined that it is decided to execute the flash performance at the time of winning (step 07AKS307; Yes), the flash performance at the time of winning, which is determined at step 07AKS306 among the flash performance at the time of weak winning and the flash performance at the time of strong winning, is started. Settings are made (step 07AKS308), and the process moves to step 07AKS309. With such a configuration, the win-time flash effect is started (step 07AKS308) when the condition for starting the variable display targeted for the win-time flash effect is met (step 07AKS301; Yes). ).

At step 07AKS309, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the background change effect is being executed by determining whether data corresponding to execution of the background change effect is stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. is determined (step 07AKS309). If it is determined that the background change effect is being executed (step 07AKS309; Yes), the process moves to step 07AKS313. Thus, in the present embodiment, when a background change effect has already been executed for one variable display (step 07AKS309; Yes), a new background change effect is executed for another variable display. not.

If it is determined that the background change effect is not executed (step 07AKS309; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the background change effect determination table shown in FIG. Accordingly, it determines whether or not to execute a background change effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning command received at step 07AKS301 (step 07AKS310). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AKS310, the background change effect is executed according to the variable display result, according to the determination ratio shown in the background change effect determination table of FIG. or "executed". The variable display result may be specified based on the winning determination result specified as the notification content of the start winning command in the process of step 07AKS302.

In the background change effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-16, when the variable display result is "win", the background change effect is performed at a rate higher than the rate at which the background change effect is not executed ("no execution"). It is configured to be determined to execute (“with execution”). On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", it is determined not to execute the background change effect at a rate higher than the rate at which the background change effect is determined to be executed. According to such a configuration, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the background change effect is executed (higher chance of winning) than when the background change effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-16, whether or not the background change effect is executed is determined regardless of the currently controlled effect mode and whether or not the color-based display effect is executed. For this reason, unlike the winning flash effect, the background change effect is limited in execution even if the color display effect is not executed when the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode is controlled. not. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the color display effect is not executed while being controlled in the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode, the variable display in common with the corresponding display effect can be executed. Of the winning flash effect and the background changing effect, the execution of the winning flash effect, which is more closely related to the corresponding display effect than the background changing effect, is restricted, while the execution of the background changing effect is not restricted. ing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from having excessive expectations, suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and increase the execution frequency of the effect that can be executed for the variable display that is common to the color-based display. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the excessive decrease, and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, after executing the process of step 07AKS310, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step 07AKS310 to execute the background change effect (step 07AKS311). If it is determined that the background change effect is not to be executed (step 07AKS311; No), the process moves to step 07AKS313. When it is determined that the background change effect is to be executed (step 07AKS311; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the screen of the image display device 5 to start the background change effect (step 07AKS312), and the process is Go to step 07 AKS313. With such a configuration, the background change effect is started based on the start condition of the variable display targeted for the background change effect being met (step 07AKS301; Yes) (step 07AKS312).

At step 07AKS313, the effect control CPU 120 stores data corresponding to the determination result (whether or not flash effect is executed and the type at the time of winning, and whether or not background change effect is executed) in the process of step 07AKS306 or step 07AKS310 in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. After storing the decision result (step 07 AKS313), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined at step 07AKS304 that the winning flash effect is being executed (step 07AKS304; Yes), or if it is determined that the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed at step 07AKS305 (step 07AKS305; Yes) In step 07AKS313, data indicating that the winning flash effect will not be executed is stored in the reservation-related data storage unit 07AKM1. Further, when it is determined at step 07AKS309 that the background change effect is being executed (step 07AKS309; Yes), at step 07AKS313, data indicating that the background change effect is not executed is stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. remembered.

FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 07AKS303 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in the flow chart of FIG.

When the corresponding display effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a random number lottery using the color-corresponding display effect determination table shown in FIG. Depending on the result, execution/non-execution of the color correspondence display effect and the final display mode, which is the final display mode of the correspondence display in the color correspondence display effect, are determined (step 07AKS401). Specifically, in the process of step 07AKS401, the final display of the corresponding display is performed according to the currently controlled effect mode and the variable display result at the determination ratio shown in the color-corresponding display effect determination table of FIG. 8-18. The mode is determined to be one of "white", "blue", "green", and "red". "White" is the normal display mode as a display mode when the color-based display effect is not executed, and "blue", "green", and "red" are the display mode when the color-based display effect is executed. This is a special display mode as a display mode. In the processing of step 07AKS401, it is determined not to execute the color-corresponding display effect by determining the final display mode of the corresponding display to be "white". On the other hand, in the process of step 07AKS401, it is decided to execute the color correspondence display effect by determining the final display mode of the correspondence display to be any one of "blue", "green" and "red". The currently controlled production mode may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance production up mode flag is set to the ON state. . The variable display result may be specified based on the winning determination result specified as the notification content of the start winning command in the process of step 07AKS302.

In the color corresponding display effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-18, the variable display result is the same regardless of which effect mode of the normal mode, the chance effect increase mode, the color display expectation increase mode, and the color display premier mode is controlled. When a "win" is achieved and controlled to an advantageous state, the final display mode of the corresponding display is determined at a high rate in the order of "white"<"blue"<"green"<"red". On the other hand, in the color correspondence display effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-18, variable display is possible even when the control is performed in any of the normal mode, the chance effect increase mode, the color display expectation increase mode, and the color display premier mode. When the result is "losing" and the control is not in an advantageous state, the final display mode of the corresponding display is determined in the order of "red" < "green" < "blue" < "white" at a high rate. . With such a configuration, the hit expectation for the final display mode of the corresponding display increases in the order of "white"<"blue"<"green"<"red". It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 8-18 is only an example, and the determination ratio is arbitrarily determined so that the hit expectation in the final display mode increases in the order of “white” < “blue” < “green” < “red”. can be set.

As shown in FIG. 8-18, when the variable display result is "hit" when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled, the variable display result is determined when the normal mode or the chance effect increase mode is controlled. is determined to be "hit", the ratio of determining that the color corresponding display effect is not executed ("white (no execution)") is lower. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "failed" when controlled in the color display expectation level up mode, when the variable display result is "failed" when controlled in the normal mode or the chance production mode. , the rate at which it is determined that the color-based display effect is not executed is higher than the above. With such a configuration, when the color display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the color corresponding display effect is executed when the control is performed in the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode. The probability of winning is higher than when is executed (the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state is high). It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 8-18 is only an example, and when the color display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is selected. The determination ratio can be arbitrarily set so that the degree of expectation for winning is higher when the control is performed than when the display performance corresponding to color is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-18, when the variable display result is "win" under control in the color display premier mode, the variable display result is "win" under control in the color display expectation increase mode. ”, the ratio of determination that the color-based display effect is not executed (“white (no execution)”) is lower. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "failed" when controlled to the color display premier mode, the variable display result is "failed" when controlled to the color display expectation increase mode. There is a high percentage of decisions that the color-based display effect is not executed. With such a configuration, the color-responsive display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is controlled, and the color-responsive display effect is executed when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled. The expectation of winning is higher than when it was (the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state is high). It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 8-18 is only an example, and when the color display performance is executed when the color display premier mode is being controlled, the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. The determination ratio can be arbitrarily set so that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the color-based display effect is executed when the player is present.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the variable display result is "hit" under control in the color display premier mode, the final display mode of the corresponding display is set to "blue" or "green". , or "red", it is possible to decide to execute the color corresponding display effect. The final display mode is not determined to be "blue", "green" or "red", and is not determined when the color correspondence display effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the color display premier mode is controlled and the color corresponding display effect is executed, the control is always performed in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 8-18, when the color display expectation level-up mode or the color display premier mode in which the probability of winning is higher than the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, the variable display result is "losing". When it becomes, the final display mode of the correspondence display is configured not to be determined as "red" which has the highest probability of winning. According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation degree-up mode or the color display premier mode in which the probability of winning is higher than the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, the display effect corresponding to the color is executed. Although the display is displayed in ``red'', which is the highest expectation for winning, the variable display result is ``losing'' and control is not performed in an advantageous state, and the player is disappointed and the interest in the game is reduced. can be prevented. Note that this is only an example, and when the variable display result is "losing" when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled, when the normal mode or the chance effect increase mode is controlled, The final display mode of the correspondence display may be determined to be “red” at a lower rate than when the variable display result is “no”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

As described above, in the processing of step 07AKS401, depending on the presently controlled presentation mode and the result of the variable display, whether or not the color-based display presentation is executed, and the color-based display presentation as a mode of the color-based display presentation are executed. determines the final display mode of the corresponding display in . As a result, for example, when it is controlled in the normal mode and when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode, at different determination ratios, multiple types of modes such as "blue", "green", and "red" It is configured to be able to decide in which of the two to execute the color corresponding display effect.

In addition, with such a configuration, after the start condition (execution condition) of the variable display is established due to the occurrence of the starting prize when being controlled to one effect mode (step 07AKS301; Yes), the mode switching operation is performed by the player. Based on the fact that the (selection operation) is performed, the one rendering mode is switched to another rendering mode, and when the other rendering mode is being controlled, the color corresponding display rendering targeting the variable display is started. If, by the processing of step 07AKS401, the production mode when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (production mode that is controlled at the time the processing of step 07AKS401 is performed), in the production mode before switching It is determined in which one of a plurality of modes (“blue”, “green”, “red”) the color corresponding display effect is to be executed by the determined ratio in the case of being controlled to the one effect mode. . For example, after the condition for starting variable display is met when the normal mode is controlled, the normal mode is controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode based on the mode switching operation performed by the player, and the color display is performed. When the color correspondence display effect for the variable display is started under control in the expectation-increasing mode, color correspondence is performed in any of a plurality of modes at a determined ratio in the case of control in the normal mode. It is determined whether to execute the display effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden caused by switching the production mode (production state).

It should be noted that, after the start condition of the variable display is satisfied when it is controlled to one production mode, control is performed from the one production mode to another production mode based on the mode switching operation performed by the player. , when the color-based display effect targeting the variable display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the other effect mode, the determination in the case where the effect mode after switching is controlled to the other effect mode. It may be possible to determine in which of a plurality of types of aspects the color-based display effect is to be executed in proportion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the aspect of the color-based display effect at a determination ratio corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player, thereby improving the interest in the game. Specifically, when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the start winning while being controlled to one production mode (step 07AKS301; Yes), the processing of step 07AKS401 is performed to control to the one production mode. After determining whether or not to execute the color-corresponding display effect for the variable display and the final display mode of the corresponding display (mode of the color-corresponding display effect), the mode switching operation is performed by the player. When the one performance mode is switched to the other performance mode based on the fact that it is determined, the execution of the color correspondence display performance targeting the variable display at the determined ratio in the case of being controlled to the other performance mode. The final display mode of presence/absence and corresponding display may be re-determined, and the result of determination in step 07AKS401 may be overwritten with the result of this re-determination.

In addition, during the period from when the effect mode switching is confirmed until the effect mode is switched (the period during which the mode switching reservation setting is performed), if the start condition for the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the start winning, after switching Whether or not to execute the color-corresponding display effect and the final display mode of the corresponding display may be determined by the determined ratio in the case of being controlled in the effect mode of (1). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the aspect of the color-based display effect at a determination ratio corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the process of step 07AKS401, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current total number of pending memories is 0 (step 07AKS402). The current total number of reserved memories may be specified based on the total reserved memory number notification command received as the start winning command in step 07AKS301. If it is determined that the current total number of pending memories is 0 (step 07AKS402; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying active display in "white" as the normal display mode (step 07AKS403), and the process is Go to step 07 AKS412.

In step 07AKS402, when it is determined that the total number of pending memories is not 0 (step 07AKS402; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step 07AKS401 to execute the color-based display effect (the final display mode is (step 07AKS404). When it is determined that the color-based display effect is to be executed (the final display mode is determined to be one of "blue", "green", and "red") (step 07AKS404; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 8-19, a random number lottery is performed using the pending display effect at the time of execution of the color-corresponding display effect shown in FIG. 8-19. Depending on the display result, whether or not to execute the suspension display effect and the type are determined (step 07AKS405). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AK405, it is currently controlled whether or not the mode switching preparation display is being displayed at the determination ratio shown in the color-corresponding display effect execution pending display effect determination table of FIG. 8-19. Depending on the effect mode and the variable display result, "no execution" in which the pending display effect is not executed, "color pending display effect" in which the color pending display effect is executed, and white character pending display effect is executed. and a "red character pending display effect" in which a red character pending display effect is executed. In the processing of step 07 AKS405, it is determined to execute the suspension display effect by determining any one of "color suspension display effect", "white character suspension display effect", and "red character suspension display effect". In the process of step 07 AKS405, it is determined to execute the character suspension display effect by determining either "white character suspension display effect" or "red character suspension display effect". Whether or not the mode-switching-preparing display is being displayed may be specified based on whether the mode-switching-preparing display flag is on. The currently controlled production mode may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance production up mode flag is set to the ON state. . The variable display result may be specified based on the winning determination result specified as the notification content of the start winning command in the process of step 07AKS302. In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" when controlled to the color display premier mode and control is not performed to an advantageous state, the color-based display effect is not executed. , the decision ratio is not set.

In the processing of step 07 AKS405, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. It is determined that the pending display effect is not executed (“no execution”) at a higher rate when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. In other words, in the processing of step 07AKS405, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode. It is determined that the suspension display effect is executed at a higher rate than the time (it is determined to be one of "color suspension display effect", "white character suspension display effect", and "red character suspension display effect"). It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 is only an example, and the ratio is higher when controlled in the color display expectation increase mode than when controlled in the normal mode or the chance effect increase mode. When it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and when the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled, the pending display effect is executed at a higher rate than when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled. You can arbitrarily set the determination percentage as determined.

In the processing of step 07AKS405 executed based on the decision to execute the color corresponding display effect in step 07AKS401 (step 07AKS404; Yes), it is decided not to execute the reserved display effect including the color reserved display effect. , it is determined to execute the color active display effect as the color corresponding display effect. As a result, the corresponding display effect executes the active display effect (color active display effect) as the corresponding display effect in the second specific period without executing the suspended display effect as the corresponding display effect in the first specific period. It is determined that the execution pattern will be two patterns (an execution pattern in which the corresponding display effect is executed in the second specific period without executing the corresponding display effect in the first specific period). On the other hand, in the process of step 07AKS405, by determining to execute the pending display effect, the corresponding display effect is the first pattern (at least the first It is determined to be executed in the execution pattern for executing the corresponding display effect in the specific period).

In the characteristic part 007AK, in the processing of step 07AKS405, it is determined that the holding display effect is executed at a higher rate when the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled than when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled. As a result, the corresponding display effect is executed when the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled, while the corresponding display effect is executed when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled. It is configured such that the ratio of execution of the corresponding display effect in the execution pattern that is the first pattern is higher than when the corresponding display effect is executed. In the characteristic part 007AK, in the processing of step 07AKS405, the holding display effect is given at a higher rate when being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode than when being controlled in the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode. is determined not to be executed, corresponding to the case of being controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode When the display effect is executed, it corresponds to the case of being controlled to the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the corresponding display effect in the execution pattern that is the second pattern is higher than when the display effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

According to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19, when the display during preparation for mode switching is not displayed, when it is decided to execute the pending display effect while being controlled in the normal mode or the chance effect up mode. However, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when it is decided not to execute the reservation display effect when the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled (the probability of winning is high). With such a configuration, when the corresponding display effect is executed in the first pattern when the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled. In addition, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the corresponding display effect is executed in the second pattern. On the other hand, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, it is more than when it is decided to execute the pending display effect when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. Also, when it is determined not to execute the pending display effect when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher (the degree of winning expectation is high). With such a configuration, when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the second pattern is executed when the corresponding display effect is executed in the first pattern rather than when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the corresponding display effect is executed in the pattern. According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the player is asked whether or not the corresponding display effect will be executed in the second specific period after the first specific period. It can attract attention and improve the performance effect. It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 is only an example, and when it is decided to execute the pending display effect when the control is in the normal mode or the chance effect up mode, the normal mode or the chance effect up mode is selected. The rate of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when it is decided not to execute the pending display effect when controlled by the mode, and the pending display effect is executed when controlled by the color display expectation increase mode Arbitrarily so that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when it is determined not to execute the pending display effect when it is controlled to the color display expectation increase mode than when it is determined to be You can set the decision ratio.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, when the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled. The ratio of determination to execute the red character pending display effect (“red character pending display effect”) is lower than that. According to this configuration, when the player is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode in which the winning expectation when the color-based display effect is executed is higher than the normal mode and the chance effect increase mode, the player can: It is possible to prevent a red character holding display effect using a specific display element (a color different from white) common to the color corresponding display effect from being misidentified as the color corresponding display effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in game interest. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is more controlled when the color display expectation increasing mode is selected. The percentage of decisions to execute the white character pending display effect (“white character pending display effect”) is higher than when the character is present. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the excessive decrease in the execution frequency (execution ratio) of the character pending display effect when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. . In addition, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the white character is reserved at the same rate when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode and when it is controlled in the normal mode or the chance production mode. A display effect may be executed.

In the characteristic part 007AK, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the normal mode or the chance production up mode is selected when the color display expectation level up mode is controlled. The rate at which it is decided to execute the color-reserving display effect (“color-reserving display effect”) is lower than when it is being controlled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is more controlled when the color display expectation increasing mode is selected. The ratio of determination to execute the character suspension display effect (determined to be either “white character suspension display effect” or “red character suspension display effect”) is higher than when the character is present. According to such a configuration, in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, even though the color reservation display effect is executed, the control is not performed in an advantageous state, and the player's expectation is spoiled. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the excessive restriction of execution of the pending display effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparing display is not displayed and the color display premier mode is being controlled, it is not decided to execute the red character pending display effect. According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in the color display premier mode in which the probability of winning is highest when the color-based display effect is executed, the player can change the red character pending display effect to the color-based display effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to misidentification.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the color display is higher when the color display premier mode is controlled than when the color display expectation level up mode is controlled. The rate of determination to execute the pending display effect is low. Also, if the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, it is decided that the character pending display effect will be executed when it is controlled in the color display premier mode rather than when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode. low rate of According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the feeling of specialness when the reserved display effect as the corresponding display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is being controlled, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the characteristic part 007AK, by determining whether or not to execute the pending display effect and the type of the pending display effect at the determination ratio shown in FIG. It is configured not to restrict the execution of the character pending display effect (the second type of suggestive effect) while restricting the execution of the (first type of suggestive effect). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, it is controlled to any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode. It is restricted so that it is not determined to execute the color reservation display effect even when the On the other hand, even when the control is performed in any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode, the mode switching preparation is performed when the mode switching preparation display is displayed. It is decided to execute the character pending display effect at a higher rate than when the middle display is not displayed. As described above, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the start condition (execution condition) of the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the starting prize during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed (step 07AKS301; Yes), step 07AKS404. By executing the process of (1), the execution of the color pending display effect for the variable display is restricted within the predetermined period, while the execution of the character pending display effect for the variable display is not restricted. is configured to According to such a configuration, in a predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display for notifying the switching of the production mode is displayed, by executing the color reservation display production with different hit expectations according to the production mode, The player cannot grasp whether the color reservation display performance is executed with the winning expectation degree corresponding to the performance mode before switching or the winning expectation degree corresponding to the performance mode after switching. It is possible to suppress confusion and a decrease in amusement. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, during the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparing display is displayed, the execution of the pending display effect is suppressed from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the game. can suppress the decrease in

More specifically, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode is selected. , it is restricted so that it is not determined to execute the red character pending display effect. On the other hand, even when the control is in any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode, the mode switching preparation is performed when the mode switching preparation display is displayed. It is decided to execute the white character pending display effect at a higher rate than when the middle display is not displayed. That is, the characteristic part 007AK restricts execution of the red character pending display effect using a specific display element (a color different from white) common to the color-based display effect during a predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. On the other hand, it is configured not to limit the execution of the white character pending display effect that does not use the specific display element. According to such a configuration, by executing the holding display effect in a display mode similar to the color-based display effect, it is possible to suppress the player's misunderstanding and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the character suspension display effect from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the process of step 07AKS405 executed based on the decision to execute the color-dependent display effect in step 07AKS401 (step 07AKS404; Yes), by determining not to execute the color-reserved display effect, the color-dependent display It is determined to execute a color active display effect as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the mode switching preparation in progress display is displayed, by restricting the decision to execute the color pending display effect, the mode switching in preparation In the predetermined period during which the display is displayed, if the start condition for the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the start winning, the color reservation display effect for the variable display is not executed during the predetermined period, and the variable display is performed. While the reserved display corresponding to is restricted not to change to the color display mode, after the end of the predetermined period, in the second specific period in which the variable display is executed, the color active display for the variable display An effect is executed, and the active display corresponding to the variable display is configured to change to a color display mode. It should be noted that if the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied due to the occurrence of the starting prize during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is being displayed, the process of step 07AKS401 is restricted so as not to determine that the color-based display effect is to be executed. Accordingly, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display may be restricted so as not to change to the color display mode.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the execution of the color reservation display effect is restricted. If it is displayed, the execution of the color pending display effect may be limited to a rate lower than that when the mode switching preparations display is not displayed and a rate higher than 0%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending display effect from being excessively restricted during the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, and to suppress the decrease in the game interest.

In the present embodiment, when the display of preparation for mode switching is displayed, it is assumed that the execution of the red character pending display effect is restricted, but this is only an example, and the display of preparation for mode switching is displayed, the execution of the red character pending display rendering may be restricted at a rate lower than when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed and at a rate higher than 0%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending display effect from being excessively restricted during the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, and to suppress the decrease in game interest.

In addition, when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the variable display result is "losing" and if the control is not in an advantageous state, the color reservation display effect is restricted so that it is not executed, while the variable display result is "hit". and may be configured to be able to execute the color reservation display effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect and improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, when it is determined in step 07AKS404 that the color correspondence display effect is not executed in step 07AKS401 (the final display mode is determined to be "white") (step 07AKS404; No), The effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the display effect pending when the color corresponding display effect is not executed shown in FIG. Depending on the present effect mode and the result of the variable display, whether or not to execute the pending display effect and the type are determined (step 07AKS413). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AK413, it is currently controlled whether or not the display during preparation for mode switching is being displayed in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the reserved display effect determination table for non-execution of display effect corresponding to color shown in FIG. 8-20. Depending on the effect mode and the variable display result, "no execution" in which the pending display effect is not executed, "white character pending display effect" in which the white character pending display effect is executed, and red character pending display effect is determined to be one of the "red character pending display effect" to be executed. In the process of step 07 AKS413, it is determined to execute the character suspension display effect by determining either "white character suspension display effect" or "red character suspension display effect". In the process of step 07AKS413, which is executed based on the decision not to execute the color-dependent display effect in step 07AKS401 (step 07AKS404; No), by determining not to execute the pending display effect, the color-dependent display It is determined not to execute corresponding display effects such as effects and character-compatible display effects. In the process of step 07AKS413, which is executed based on the decision not to execute the color corresponding display effect in step 07AKS401 (step 07AKS404; No), by determining to execute the character pending display effect, the corresponding display effect is executed. However, it is determined that the execution pattern, which is the first pattern, is executed in which the character suspension display effect is executed in the first specific period and the white active display is executed in the second specific period.

According to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display during preparation for mode switching is not displayed ("no display"), the character suspension display effect is executed when the normal mode or the chance effect up mode is controlled. Then, when it is decided (either "white character pending display effect" or "red character pending display effect") and when it is controlled to the color display expectation increase mode, the character pending display effect is executed. The rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is the same between when and when it is (hitting expectations are the same). Further, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display during preparation for mode switching is not displayed ("no display"), when the color display premier mode is controlled, the character suspension display effect is executed. When it is determined (either "white character pending display effect" or "red character pending display effect"), it is controlled to normal mode, chance effect up mode or color display expectation level up mode. When the characters are present, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the character suspension display effect is executed (the probability of winning is high). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness and improve the amusement of the game when the character suspension display effect as the corresponding display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is controlled. It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-20 is only an example, and when it is determined to execute the character pending display effect when being controlled in the color display premium mode, the normal mode, the chance effect up mode, or the The determined ratio can be arbitrarily set so that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the character reservation display performance is executed when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, when the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is controlled. The ratio of determination to execute the red character pending display effect (“red character pending display effect”) is lower than that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the red character pending display effect as the color-based display effect, and thus reducing the interest in the game when the color display expectation increasing mode is set. can. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the normal mode or the chance effect increasing mode is more controlled when the color display expectation increasing mode is selected. The percentage of decisions to execute the white character pending display effect (“white character pending display effect”) is higher than when the character is present. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to an excessive decrease in the execution frequency (execution ratio) of the character pending display effect when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. . In addition, when the mode switching preparation display is not displayed, the white character is reserved at the same rate when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode and when it is controlled in the normal mode or the chance production mode. A display effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the mode switching preparing display is not displayed and the color display premier mode is being controlled, it is not decided to execute the red character pending display effect. According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in the color display premier mode in which the probability of winning is the highest when the color-based display effect is executed, the player can change the red character pending display effect to the color-based display effect. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to misidentification.

According to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-20, when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, it is controlled to any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode. Also, it is restricted so that it is not decided to execute the red character pending display effect. On the other hand, even when the control is in any of the normal mode, the chance effect enhancement mode, the color display expectation enhancement mode, and the color display premier mode, when the mode switch preparation display is displayed, the mode switch preparation display is displayed. is not displayed, it is decided to execute the white character pending display effect at a rate equal to or greater than that. That is, during a predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the execution of the red character pending display effect is restricted, while the execution of the white character pending display effect is not restricted. According to such a configuration, by executing the holding display effect in a display mode similar to the color-based display effect, it is possible to suppress the player's misunderstanding and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the character suspension display effect from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, when the mode switching preparations display is displayed, the execution of the red character pending display effect is restricted to a rate lower than that when the mode switching preparations display is not displayed and higher than 0%. may According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending display effect from being excessively restricted during the predetermined period in which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, and to suppress the decrease in the game interest.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute color-dependent display effects such as color-suspended display effects and color-active display effects (step 07AKS401), it is determined whether or not to execute character-suspended display effects as character-dependent display effects. (Steps 07AKS405, 07AKS413), but this is only an example, and after determining whether or not to execute the character pending display effect (character-corresponding display effect), it is possible to determine whether to execute the color-corresponding display effect. . Alternatively, whether or not to execute the character pending display effect and whether or not to execute the color-based display effect may be determined by a single process. In these forms, when controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, the color support such as the color reserved display effect and the color active display effect as the first type suggestive effect is more than the case of the normal mode control. While the display performance is executed at a low rate, the character pending display performance as the suggestive performance of the second type may be executed at a higher rate than when the normal mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, even though the color corresponding display effect is executed, the control is not performed in an advantageous state, and the player's sense of expectation is spoiled. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the excessive restriction on the execution of the corresponding display effect. In this case, when the color display premier mode is controlled, the color-adaptive display effects such as the color reserved display effect and the color active display are executed more than when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled. is low, and when controlled in the color display premier mode, the proportion at which the character pending display effect is executed is lower than when controlled in the color display expectation increase mode. good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the corresponding display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, and to improve the amusement of the game. In this case, when the character pending display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is controlled, the normal mode, the chance effect increasing mode, or the color display expectation degree increasing mode are controlled. In this case, the ratio of control to an advantageous state may be higher than when the character suspension display effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the corresponding display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the process of step 07AKS405, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided in step 07AKS405 to execute the color reservation display effect (step 07AKS406). When it is determined in step 07AKS406 that it is decided not to execute the color reservation display effect (step 07AKS406; No), or after executing the process of step 07AKS413, the effect control CPU 120 executes character reservation in step 07AKS405 or step 07AKS413. It is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the display effect (step 07AKS405). When it is determined that the character suspension display effect is not to be executed (step 07AKS405; No), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new suspension display in "white" as the normal display mode (step 07AKS414). If it is determined at step 07AKS405 that execution of the character suspension display effect is determined at step 07AKS405 or step 07AKS413 (step 07AKS405; Yes), effect control CPU 120 uses the special character effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-21. By performing a random number lottery at step 07AKS405 or step 07AKS413, depending on the type of character suspension display effect (white character suspension display effect, red character suspension display effect) and the variable display result, It is determined whether or not to execute the special character presentation (step 07AKS408). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AKS408, the special character effect is not executed according to the type of character pending display effect and the variable display result at the determination ratio shown in the special character effect determination table of FIG. 8-21. It is determined to be either "not executed" or "executed" for executing the special character presentation. In the process of step 07AKS408, it is determined to execute the first special character effect by determining to execute the special character effect when the white character suspension display effect is to be executed. Further, in the process of step 07AKS408, it is determined to execute the second special character effect by determining to execute the special character effect when the red character suspension display effect is to be executed.

According to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-21, the case where the white character pending display effect is executed (“white character pending display effect”) and the case where the red character pending display effect is executed (“red character pending display effect ), and when it is determined to execute the special character presentation (“with execution”), it is more advantageous than when it is determined not to perform the special character presentation (“no execution”). The rate of being controlled by the state is high (high expectation of winning). Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 is only an example, and the special character effect is executed both when the white character pending display effect is executed and when the red character pending display effect is executed. Then, the determination ratio can be arbitrarily set so that the degree of expectation for winning is higher when it is determined than when it is determined not to execute the special character presentation.

Further, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-21, the ratio of executing the special character effect when the red character pending display effect is executed is higher than when the white character pending display effect is executed. is high. It should be noted that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 is only an example, and it is determined that the special character effect is executed when the red character suspension display effect is executed rather than when the white character suspension display effect is executed. The decision ratio can be arbitrarily set so that the ratio of

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the process of step 07AKS408 or when it is determined in step 07AKS406 that it is decided to execute the color pending display effect (step 07AKS406; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display effect. A pending change pattern designating a change (transition) of the display mode of the pending display is determined (step 07AKS409).

When it is determined in step 07AKS406 that it is decided to execute the color reserved display effect (step 07AKS406; Yes), in the processing of step 07AKS409, the effect control CPU 120 designates a change in the display mode of the reserved display in the color reserved display effect. A color retention change pattern that is determined as a retention change pattern. In this embodiment, 13 kinds of color retention change patterns PP01 to PP24 shown in FIG. 8-22(A) are prepared in advance as color retention change patterns that can be determined as the color retention change patterns in step 07AKS409. The color retention change patterns shown in FIG. 8-22(A) include color retention change patterns PP01 to PP03 in which the number of times the display mode of the suspension display has changed is 0, and color retention change patterns PP01 to PP03 in which the number of times the display mode of the suspension display has changed is 1. It includes certain color retention change patterns PP11 to PP16 and color retention change patterns PP21 to PP24 in which the number of times of change in the display mode of the retention display is two.

In the color holding change pattern in which the number of display mode changes is 0, the display mode does not change. For example, in the color retention change pattern PP01 included in the color retention change pattern with the number of display mode changes being 0, the display mode does not change from "blue". In the color reservation change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 1, the display modes before and after the change are specified. For example, the display mode changes from "white" to "blue" in the color retention change pattern PP11 included in the color retention change pattern in which the display mode is changed once. In the color reservation change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is two, the display mode before and after the first change and the display mode after the second change are specified. For example, in the color retention change pattern PP21 included in the color retention change pattern in which the number of display mode changes is two, the first change causes the display mode to change from "white" to "blue", and the second change causes the display mode to change from "white" to "blue". Due to the change, the display mode changes from "blue" to "green".

If it is determined at step 07AKS406 that the execution of the color reservation display effect is determined (step 07AKS406; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, in the processing at step 07AKS409, determines the current total number of reserved storage and the number determined at step 07AKS401. Depending on the final display mode of the corresponding display, any one of the color retention change patterns PP01 to PP24 shown in FIG. 8-22(A) is determined as the retention change pattern. The total number of reserved memories may be specified based on the total reserved memory number notification command received as the start winning command in step 07AKS301.

FIG. 8-22(B) shows an example of determination of the pending change pattern in step 07AKS409 when the total pending storage number is 1 when it is determined to execute the color pending display effect (step 07AKS406; Yes). there is As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), when the total number of reserved memories is 1, depending on the final display mode of the corresponding display, the number of changes in the display mode is 0 times. A color reserved change pattern with a change count of 1 is determined as the reserved change pattern. Specifically, among the color retention change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 0 and the color retention change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 1, the color retention change pattern or the display in which the display mode is the final display mode A color retention change pattern having a display mode with a lower expectation of winning than the final display mode is determined as a retention change pattern. That is, when the final display mode is "blue", one of the color pending change patterns PP01 and PP11 with a display mode of "blue" is determined as the pending change pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. When the final display mode is "green", the change patterns PP02, PP12, and PP14 where the display mode is "green" at a determined ratio according to the degree of winning expectation, and the degree of winning expectation is lower than that of the display mode "green". Either of the changing patterns PP01 and PP11 that becomes "blue" is determined as the pending changing pattern. When the final display mode is "red", the change patterns PP03, PP13, PP15, PP16 where the display mode is "red" at a determined ratio according to the winning expectation, and the winning expectation is higher than the display mode is "red" Any one of the change patterns PP01, PP02, PP11, PP12, PP14 that results in "blue" or "green" with a low V is determined as the pending change pattern.

FIG. 8-22(C) shows an example of determination of the pending change pattern in step 07AKS409 when it is determined to execute the color pending display effect (step 07AKS406; Yes) and the total number of pending memories is 2 or more. ing. As shown in FIG. 8-22(C), when the total number of reserved memories is 2 or more, a color reserved change pattern whose number of display appearance changes is 0 according to the final display appearance of the corresponding display, a display appearance A color retention change pattern in which the number of changes is one or a color retention change pattern in which the number of display mode changes is two is determined as the retention change pattern. Specifically, among the color retention change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 0, the color retention change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 1, and the color retention change pattern in which the number of times the display mode is changed is 2, , a color retention change pattern in which the display mode is the final display mode or a color retention change pattern in which the display mode is a display mode with a lower degree of expectation for winning than the final display mode is determined as the retention change pattern. That is, when the final display mode is "blue", one of the color retention change patterns PP01 and PP11 with the display mode "blue" is determined as the retention change pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. When the final display mode is "green", the change patterns PP02, PP12, PP14, PP21 where the display mode is "green" at a determined ratio according to the winning expectation, and the winning expectation is higher than the display mode is "green" Any one of the change patterns PP01 and PP11 that becomes "blue" with a low V is determined as the pending change pattern. When the final display mode is "red", the change pattern PP03, PP13, PP15, PP16, PP22 to PP24 where the display mode is "red" at a determined ratio according to the hit expectation, the display mode is from "red" Any one of the change patterns PP01, PP02, PP11, PP12, PP14, and PP21, which becomes "blue" or "green" with a low probability of winning, is determined as a pending change pattern.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, when it is determined in step 07AKS407 that it is decided to execute the character suspension display effect (step 07AKS407; Yes), in the processing of step 07AKS409, the effect control CPU 120 executes the suspension display in the character suspension display effect. A character pending change pattern designating a change in the display mode of is determined as a pending change pattern. In this embodiment, four types of character hold change patterns PQ01 to PQ12 shown in FIG. 8-23(A) are prepared in advance as character hold change patterns that can be determined as the hold change pattern. The character suspension change pattern shown in FIG. 8-23(A) includes a character suspension change pattern in which the number of times the display mode of the suspension display has changed is 0, and a character suspension pattern in which the number of times the display mode of the suspension display has changed is 1. A pattern of change and a are included. Character suspension change pattern PQ01 in which the display mode does not change from "white character" and character suspension change pattern PQ02 in which the display mode does not change from "red character" are character suspension change patterns in which the number of display mode changes is 0. ,It is included. The character suspension change pattern in which the number of times the display mode changes is 1 includes the character suspension change pattern PQ11 in which the display mode changes from "white" to "white character" and the display mode from "white" to "red character". A changing character hold change pattern PQ12 is included.

If it is determined in step 07AKS407 that the character suspension display effect is to be executed (step 07AKS407; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the character suspension display effect determined in step 07AKS405 or step 07AKS413 in the process of step 07AKS409. (white character suspension display effect, red character suspension display effect), the suspension change pattern is determined to be one of the character suspension change patterns PQ01 to PQ12 shown in FIG. 8-23(A). FIG. 8-23(B) shows an example of determination of the suspension change pattern in step 07AKS409 when it is determined to execute the character suspension display effect (step 07AKS407; Yes). As shown in FIG. 8-23(B), when it is determined to execute the white character suspension display effect, the character suspension change pattern PQ01 in which the display mode becomes "white character" at a determination ratio according to the degree of expectation of winning, Any of PQ11 is determined as the pending change pattern. In addition, when it is determined to execute the red character pending display effect, either of the character pending change patterns PQ02 and PQ12 in which the display mode is "red character" is determined as the pending change pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. be done.

In the process of step 07AKS409, the pending change pattern may be determined such that the greater the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation of winning.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the processing of step 07AKS409, the effect control CPU 120, in accordance with the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409, the execution timing of the pending display change in the pending display effect (step 07AKS410). In this embodiment, the pending change timing patterns that can be determined in step 07AKS410 are a pending change timing pattern with zero change timing, a pending change timing pattern with one change timing, and a two change timing pattern. is prepared in advance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-24(A), a pending change timing pattern PR01 in which the display mode of the pending display does not change is prepared in advance as a pending change timing pattern in which the change timing is 0 times. Further, as a pending change timing pattern with one change timing, as shown in FIG. A pending change timing pattern PR12 that is the timing displayed as the second pending display, a pending change timing pattern PR13 that is the timing displayed as the second pending display, and a pending change timing pattern PR13 that is the timing displayed as the second pending display. A pending change timing pattern PR14, which is the timing to be displayed as a display, is prepared in advance. Also, as a hold change timing pattern having two change timings, hold change timing patterns PR21 to PR26 shown in FIG. 8-24(C) are prepared in advance. In the pending change timing pattern with two change timings, the first change timing and the second change timing are specified. For example, in the hold change timing pattern PR21 included in the hold change timing pattern with two change timings, the first change timing is the timing displayed as the first hold display, and the second change timing is is the timing to shift to the active display.

In the processing of step 07AKS410, the effect control CPU 120 changes the pending change timing pattern according to the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409 and the current total pending storage number, as shown in FIGS. One of the pending change timing patterns shown in FIG. 8-24(c) is determined. The total number of reserved memories may be specified based on the total reserved memory number notification command received as the start winning command in step 07AKS301.

FIG. 8-25(A) shows that the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409 is a pending change pattern in which the number of changes in the display mode of the pending display is 0, color pending change patterns PP01 to PP03, and a character pending change pattern. It shows an example of determination of the pending change timing pattern in the case of either PQ01 or PQ02. As shown in FIG. 8-25(A), when the total pending storage number is 1 or more, the pending change timing pattern PR01 is determined as the pending change timing pattern.

FIG. 8-25(B) shows that the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409 is a pending change pattern in which the number of changes in the display mode of the pending display is one, color pending change patterns PP11 to PP16, and a character pending change pattern. An example of determination of the pending change timing pattern in the case of either PQ11 or PQ12 is shown. As shown in FIG. 8-25(B), when the total pending storage number is 1, the pending change timing pattern PR11 is determined as the pending change timing pattern. When the total number of pending memories is 2, either of the pending change timing patterns PR11 and PR12 is determined as the pending change timing pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. When the total number of pending memories is 3, one of the pending change timing patterns PR11 to PR13 is determined as the pending change timing pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. When the total number of pending memories is 4 or more, one of the pending change timing patterns PR11 to PR14 is determined as the pending change timing pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation.

In FIG. 8-25(C), the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409 is any one of the pending change patterns PP21 to PP24 in which the number of times the display mode of the pending display changes is two. 4 shows an example of determining pending change timing patterns in a case. As shown in FIG. 8-25(C), when the total pending storage number is 2, the pending change timing pattern PR21 is determined as the pending change timing pattern. When the total number of pending memories is 3, one of the pending change timing patterns PR21 to PR23 is determined as the pending change timing pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation. When the total number of pending memories is 4 or more, one of the pending change timing patterns PR21 to PR26 is determined as the pending change timing pattern at a determination ratio according to the degree of winning expectation.

In the process of step 07AKS410, the pending change timing pattern may be determined such that the pending change timing pattern with a later change timing has a higher degree of expectation for winning. It should be noted that the hold change timing pattern may be determined such that the higher the hold change timing pattern with earlier change timing, the higher the expectation of winning.

In addition, when it is controlled to the probability variable state (high probability high base state), when it is controlled to color display expectation up mode or color display premier mode, it is normal state (low probability low base state) When controlled, the pending change timing patterns are active, such as the pending change timing patterns PR11, PR21, PR22, PR24, at a higher rate than when controlled in the color display expectation up mode or the color display premier mode. It may be configured to determine a pending change timing pattern in which the display mode of the pending display changes at the timing of shifting to the display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect and improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 8-17, after executing the processing of step 07AKS410, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display in a display mode corresponding to the pending change pattern determined in step 07AKS409 (step 07AKS411 ). Specifically, if the determined pending change pattern is any one of the color pending change patterns PP11 to PP13, PP21 to PP23, or the character pending change pattern PQ11, PQ12, the display of the pending display in "white" is started and determined. If the determined retained change pattern is the color retained change pattern PP01, PP14, PP15, PP24, the display of the retained display is started in "blue", and if the determined retained change pattern is the color retained change pattern PP02, PP16 The display of the pending display is started with "green", and if the determined pending change pattern is the color pending change pattern PP03, the display of the pending display is started with "red", and the determined pending change pattern is character pending. If it is the change pattern PQ01, the display of the pending display with "white character" is started, and if the determined pending change pattern is the character pending change pattern PQ02, the display of the pending display is started with "red character".

After executing the processing of step 07AKS411 or step 07AKS414, the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination results in steps 07AKS401 to step 411, step 07AKS413, and step 07AKS414 (execution or non-execution of color corresponding display effect, final display mode of corresponding display, corresponding display (current display mode, whether or not a special character effect is executed and type, pending change pattern, pending change timing pattern) is stored in the hold related data storage unit 07AKM1 to store the determination result (step 07AKS412). , the corresponding display effect setting process ends. In addition, when the display of the active display is started in "white" by the processing of step 07AKS403, or when the display of the new pending display is started in "white" by the processing of step 07AKS414, the corresponding display is performed in step 07AKS412. Data indicating "white" is stored in the hold-related data storage unit 07AKM1 as data indicating the current display mode of . Further, when the display of a new pending display is started in the display mode corresponding to the pending change pattern by the processing of step 07AKS411, in step 07AKS414, the pending change pattern Data indicating the display mode corresponding to the status is stored in the hold-related data storage unit 07AKM1. Further, when it is determined by the processing of step 07AKS408 that the special character effect is to be executed when the white character suspension display effect is to be executed, the data indicating that the first special character effect is to be executed as the special character effect is set to the suspension related effect. It is stored in the data storage unit 07AKM1. Further, when it is determined by the processing of step 07AKS408 that the special character effect is to be executed when the red character suspension display effect is to be executed, the data indicating that the second special character effect is to be executed as the special character effect is set to the suspension related effect. It is stored in the data storage unit 07AKM1.

FIG. 8-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 07AKS102 of the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIG.

When the corresponding display related effect processing is started, the effect control CPU 120 first changes the corresponding display displayed in a special display mode such as a color display mode or a character display mode based on the contents stored in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. It is determined whether or not there is (step 07AKS501). In the processing of step 07 AKS501, it is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a corresponding display displayed in the special display mode based on the current display mode of the corresponding display specified by the suspension related data. When it is determined that there is no corresponding display displayed in the special display mode (step 07AKS501; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the corresponding display related effect processing.

When it is determined that there is a corresponding display displayed in the special display mode (step 07AKS501; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is executing the corresponding display lamp effect based on the contents stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. (step 07AKS502). In the process of step 07AKS502, it is determined whether or not the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed based on whether or not the data corresponding to the execution of the corresponding display lamp effect is stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. good. When it is determined that the corresponding display lamp effect is not being executed (step 07AKS502; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed based on the contents stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. (Step 07AKS503). In the processing of step 07AKS503, it may be determined whether or not the winning lamp effect is being executed based on whether or not the data corresponding to the execution of the winning flash effect is stored in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. .

When it is determined that the winning flash effect is not executed (step 07AKS503; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the corresponding display lamp effect for the variable display corresponding to the corresponding display displayed in the special display mode. (step 07AKS504), and the process moves to step 07AKS505. In the process of step 07AKS504, the first starting prize winning entrance lamp 9A may be set to start emitting light in the light emitting mode corresponding to the special display mode. In addition, in the process of step 07AKS504, the data indicating execution of the corresponding display lamp effect may be stored in the area corresponding to the variable display subject to the corresponding display lamp effect in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. Thus, the corresponding display lamp effect is started when the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display lamp effect changes to the special display mode (step 07AKSAKS501; Yes) (step 07AKS504). . In the process of step 07AKS504, when a plurality of corresponding displays are displayed in a special display mode and active displays are included in the plurality of corresponding displays, variable displays corresponding to the active displays are targeted. It suffices if the corresponding display lamp effect is started, and when the plurality of corresponding displays do not include an active display, a variable display corresponding to the corresponding display associated with the smallest pending number among the plurality of corresponding displays is displayed. It suffices if the corresponding display lamp effect is started as an object.

In step 07AKS503, when it is determined that the winning flash effect is being executed (step 07AKS503; Yes), the process proceeds to step 07AKS505. Thus, when the winning flash effect is being executed (step 07AKS503; Yes), the corresponding display lamp effect using the first starting winning hole lamp 9A common to the winning flash effect is not executed.

In step 07AKS502, when it is determined that the corresponding display lamp effect is being executed (step 07AKS502; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the current lighting mode of the first start winning opening lamp 9A in the corresponding display lamp effect It is determined whether or not the lighting mode is in accordance with the current display mode of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display lamp effect (step 07AKS509). The current display mode of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the corresponding display lamp effect may be specified based on the contents stored in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that the light emission mode of the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is the light emission mode according to the current display mode of the corresponding display (step 07AKS509; Yes), the process proceeds to step 07AKS505.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the light emission mode of the first start prize opening lamp 9A is not the light emission mode according to the current display mode of the corresponding display (step 07AKS509; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls the first start prize opening. The light emission mode of the lamp 9A is updated by changing it to the light emission mode according to the current display mode of the corresponding display (step 07AKS510), and the process moves to step 07AKS505. In this way, based on the fact that the corresponding display is displayed in one special display mode by performing the corresponding display change in the corresponding display effect (step 07AKS501; Yes), the corresponding one special display mode is displayed. After the corresponding display lamp effect is started by the light emitting mode (step 07AKS504), when the corresponding display is displayed in another special display mode by changing the corresponding display again in the corresponding display effect, the light emitting mode is: The light emission mode is updated (changed) to correspond to the other special display mode (step 07AKS510).

At step 07AKS505, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the premium effect is being executed based on the contents stored in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1 (step 07AKS505). In the processing of step 07AKS505, it is possible to determine whether or not the premium presentation is being executed based on whether or not data corresponding to execution of the premium presentation is stored in the reservation related data storage section 07AKM1. When determining that the premium effect is being executed (step 07AKS505; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the corresponding display related effect processing. As described above, when the premium effect is executed for one variable display (step 07AKS505; Yes), the premium effect for other variable displays is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the premium effect is not being executed (step 07AKS505; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the color display premium mode flag is set to the ON state. It is determined whether or not the mode is controlled (step 07AKS506). If it is determined that the color display premier mode is not controlled (step 07AKS506; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the corresponding display related effect processing.

When it is determined that the color display premier mode is controlled (step 07AKS506; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects "blue", "green", and "red" based on the storage contents of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. It is determined whether or not there is a corresponding display displayed in such a color display mode (step 07AKS507). In the processing of step 07 AKS507, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a corresponding display displayed in a color display mode based on the current display mode of the corresponding display specified by the pending related data. When it is determined that there is no corresponding display displayed in the color display mode (step 07AKS507; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the corresponding display related effect processing.

When it is determined that there is a corresponding display displayed in the color display mode (step 07AKS507; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to start the premium effect (step 07AKS508), and ends the corresponding display related effect. . In the process of step 07AKS508, the data indicating execution of the premium effect may be stored in the area corresponding to the variable display targeted for the premium effect in the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. In this way, when the color display premier mode is controlled (step 07AKS506; Yes) and the color correspondence display effect is executed (step 07AKS507; Yes), the first corresponding display change is executed in the color correspondence display effect. A premium effect is started based on this (step 07AKS508). In the process of step 07AKS508, when a plurality of corresponding displays are displayed in a color display mode and active displays are included in the plurality of corresponding displays, variable displays corresponding to the active displays are targeted. It is only necessary to start the premium effect, and when the plurality of corresponding displays do not include an active display, the variable display corresponding to the corresponding display associated with the smallest pending number among the plurality of corresponding displays is targeted. It is sufficient if the premiere production is started.

FIG. 8-27 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIG.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the mode switching reservation setting is performed by determining whether the mode switching reservation setting flag is set to the ON state. Determine (step 07AKS601). If it is determined that the mode switching reservation setting has not been performed (the mode switching reservation setting flag is set to OFF state) (step 07AKS601; No), the process proceeds to step 07AKS606.

When it is determined that the mode switching reservation setting is performed (the mode switching reservation setting flag is set to the ON state) (step 07AKS601; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the mode switching operation during the pending residual number count value is "0" (step 07AKS602). If it is determined that the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is not "0" (step 07AKS602; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the mode switching operation pending residual number count value by subtracting 1 ( Step 07AKS603), the process moves to step 07AKS606. In this way, the count value of the pending residual number at mode switching operation is updated by subtracting 1 each time the variable display is executed (step 07AKS603).

In step 07AKS602, when it is determined that the mode switching operation hold residual number count value is "0" (step 07AKS602; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching reservation setting flag, for example, and sets it to the OFF state. After erasing the mode switching reservation setting by doing (step 07AKS604), the mode switching setting for switching the production mode is performed (step 07AKS605), and the process moves to step 07AKS606. In the process of step 07 AKS605, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the flag corresponding to the effect mode after switching among the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance effect up mode flag. while clearing other flags and setting them to the off state. The effect mode after switching may be specified based on data indicating the effect mode after switching, which is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 when mode switching reservation setting is performed in step 07AKS216 of the mode switching process.

In this embodiment, when one or a plurality of pending information are stored and the mode switching operation is performed in a state where the total pending storage number is 1 or more (step 07AKS202; Yes), the pending residual number at mode switching operation After the count value is set to a value corresponding to the total pending memory number (step 07AKS208), and the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation (step 07AKS216), the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is " 0" (step 07AKS602; Yes), the presentation mode is switched (step 07AKS605) in response to the start of the variable display. With such a configuration, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed in a state where one or more pieces of pending information are stored, it was stored at the time when the mode switching operation was performed. After the variable display corresponding to the pending information is terminated, the effect mode is switched in response to the start of the next variable display. In addition, when the mode switching operation is performed in the state where the pending information is not stored and the total pending storage number is 0 (step 07AKS202; Yes), the mode switching operation pending remaining number count value becomes "0". is set (step 07ASK208), and after the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation (step 07AKS216), when the next variable display is started, the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is "0 (step 07AKS602; Yes), the effect mode is switched (step 07AKS605). With such a configuration, when the switching of the performance mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation performed in a state where the pending information is not stored, the switching of the performance mode is performed in response to the start of the next variable display. is done.

In step 07AKS606, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display such as the first pending display in the first pending display area 07AKB1 and the second pending display in the second pending display area 07AKB2 in response to the start of the variable display. The setting is made to do so (step 07AKS606). Specifically, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display area 07AKB1, the display part (right end display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). At the same time, the first pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" are moved rightward one by one (shifted). Also, in the active display area 07AKA1, in response to the start of the first special game, active display is started in a display mode corresponding to the first reserved display erased in the first reserved display area 07AKB1. That is, in response to the start of the first special game, the first pending display erased in the first pending display area 07AKB1 is shifted to the active display. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display area 07AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the second pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the left direction. Also, in the active display area 07AKA1, in response to the start of the second special game, active display is started in a display mode corresponding to the second reserved display erased in the second reserved display area 07AKB2. That is, in response to the start of the second special game, the second pending display erased in the second pending display area 07AKB2 is shifted to the active display.

In the processing of step 07AKS606, the storage contents in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer may be shifted in accordance with the setting for updating the pending display. Specifically, in the processing of step 07AKS606, in response to the start of the first special game, the storage contents of the hold display number "1" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning are erased, and the hold display number "2" is erased. . . . to shift the storage contents corresponding to "4" one by one. In addition, in the processing of step 07AKS606, in response to the start of the second special game, the stored content of the hold display number "1" in the command buffer at the time of the second start prize is erased, and the hold display numbers "2" to " 4" is shifted one by one.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS606, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for updating the storage contents of the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1 (step 07AKS607). In the processing of step 07AKS607, if the stored contents of buffer number "0" (active display) in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1 are erased, and the stored contents of buffer numbers "1" to "4" are shifted one by one. good.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS607, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the pending display change specified by the pending change timing pattern determined in the corresponding display effect setting process (step 07AKS608). ). The pending change timing pattern may be specified based on the storage contents of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that it is time to execute the pending display change (step 07AKS608; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display change (display of the pending display) according to the pending change pattern determined in the corresponding display effect setting process. change mode) is performed (step 07AKS609). The pending change pattern may be specified based on the storage contents of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS609 or when it is determined that it is not the time to execute the pending display change in step 07AKS608 (step 07AKS608; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the current display mode of the active display is the active It is determined whether or not it matches the final display mode of the display (step 07AKS610). The current display mode and the final display mode of the active display may be specified based on the contents stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" (storage area corresponding to the active display) of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. . If it is determined that the current display mode of the active display matches the final display mode (step 07AKS610; Yes), the process moves to step 07AKS615. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current display mode of the active display does not match the final display mode (step 07AKS610; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the active display effect (step 07AKS611).

In this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the color-based display effect (step 07AKS404; Yes) and when it is determined not to execute the color reserved display effect (step 07AKS406; No), step 07AKS610 When it is determined that the current display mode of the active display does not match the final display mode (step 07AKS610; No), it is decided to execute the active display effect (color active display effect) (step 07AKS611). Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the character suspension display effect (step 07AKS407; Yes), it is determined in step 07AKS610 that the current display mode of the active display does not match the final display mode. (Step 07AKS610; No), it is determined to execute the active display effect (color active display effect or white active display effect) (step 07AKS611).

After executing the process of step 07AKS611, the effect control CPU 120 determines an active change pattern that designates a change (transition) of the display mode of the active display in the active display effect (step 07AKS612). In this embodiment, 14 kinds of active change patterns PS01 to PS14 shown in FIG. 8-28(A) are prepared in advance as patterns that can be determined as active change patterns in the processing of step 07AKS612. The active change pattern specifies the display mode of the active display before and after the change. For example, in the active change pattern PS01, the display mode of active display changes from "white" to "blue."

The active change patterns shown in FIG. 8-22(A) include active change patterns PS07 to PS10 whose display mode before change is "white character" and active change patterns whose display mode before change is "red character". PS11 to PS14 are included. Active change patterns PS08 to PS10 whose display mode after change is the color display mode and active change patterns PS08 to PS10 whose display mode after change is the color display mode and the display mode after change which is the normal display mode of "white and an active change pattern PS07, which is ". Active change patterns PS12 to PS14 whose display mode after change is the color display mode and active change patterns PS12 to PS14 whose display mode after change is the color display mode, and the display mode after change as the normal display mode of "white and an active change pattern PS11 that is With such a configuration, after the corresponding display changes to the character display mode by executing the character corresponding display effects such as the white character pending display effect and the red character pending display effect, the color active display effect is performed for the corresponding corresponding display. When the corresponding display changes from the character display mode to the color display mode by being executed, and when the white active display effect is executed for the corresponding corresponding display, the corresponding corresponding display changes from the character display mode to the normal display mode. There are times when it changes.

In the processing of step 07AKS612, the effect control CPU 120 sets the active change pattern according to the current display mode of the active display and the final display mode of the active display. One of the patterns PS01 to PS14 is determined. FIG. 8-28(B) shows an example of determination of active change patterns in step 07AKS 612 . As shown in FIG. 8-28(B), in the process of step 07AKS612, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display mode before the change matches the current display mode of the active display, and the display mode after the change is the active display. An active change pattern that matches the final appearance is determined as the usage pattern. For example, when the current display mode of the active display is "white" and the final display mode is "blue", "white" is specified as the display mode before change, and "blue" is specified as the display mode after change. The specified active change pattern PS01 is determined as the usage pattern.

Returning to FIG. 8-27, after executing the processing of step 07AKS612, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the active display change in the active display effect (the timing of changing the display mode of the active display) (step 07AKS613). In the process of step 07AKS613, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the active display change execution timing determination table shown in FIG. to 07AKT5 (see FIG. 8-4(B)) is determined as the execution timing of the active display change. The currently controlled production mode may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance production up mode flag is set to the ON state. .

In the active display change execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 8-29, when the effect mode is the normal mode or the chance effect up mode, the determination ratio is set for the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5, and these five timings are determined. Any one of them can be determined as the execution timing of the active display change. On the other hand, when the production mode is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode, the determination ratio is not set for the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3, and only for the timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5. A decision percentage is set. That is, when the production mode is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode, one of the two timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5 can be determined as the execution timing of the active display change. In this way, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled, the number of timings within the specific period at which the active display effect (suggestion effect) can be executed is larger than the color display expectation level-up mode. Alternatively, the number of timings within a specific period at which active display effects can be executed is smaller when the color display premier mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect. In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize the active display effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

According to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-29, when the active display effect is executed when the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode is controlled, the normal mode or the chance effect up mode is selected. At a higher rate than when the active display effect is executed when it is controlled, the rate at which the active display change is executed at timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5, which are timings after timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3, is high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long time and improve the performance effect.

In addition, in the active display change execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 8-29, even when the production mode is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode, the determination ratio can be set for the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT5. Therefore, the number of timings that can be determined as execution timings for changing the active display may be the same number as when the production mode is the normal mode or the chance production up mode. In this case, when the production mode is the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode, the first timings such as the timings 07AKT1 to 07AKT3 are determined as the execution timings of the active display change, rather than the timings 07AKT4 and 07AKT5. Alternatively, the second timing at which the player's attention to the effect is higher than the first timing is determined as the active display change execution timing at a higher rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect and improve the game interest.

It should be noted that the number of timings within a specific period in which the pending display effect (suggestive effect) can be executed in the normal mode or the chance effect-up mode is controlled to the color display expectation level up mode or the color display premier mode. It may be configured so that the number of timings at which the pending display effect can be executed is smaller when the display effect is being displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect. In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize the pending display effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In the processing of step 07AKS613, by determining the execution timing of the active display change according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. The execution timing of the active display change is determined so that the ratio of the execution timing of the active display change to timing 07AKT5 in the case of being controlled to the color display premier mode is higher than the determined ratio. . As a result, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the active display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is controlled rather than when the active display effect is executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. The rate at which the active display effect is executed at timing 07AKT5 is higher in time. As described above, the timing 07AKT5 as the special timing is substantially the same timing as the timing at which the win/lose effect (notification effect) as the specific timing is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation when the winning/losing effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the color display premier mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 8-27, after executing the process of step 07AKS613, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the determination result (active change pattern, execution timing of active display change) in step 07AKS612 and step 07AKS613 as pending related data The determination result is stored by storing it in the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" (the storage area corresponding to the variable display being executed) in the storage unit 07AKM1 (step 07AKS614), and the process moves to step 07AKS615.

In the present embodiment, in the corresponding display effect setting process executed in response to the occurrence of the start winning, the pending change pattern and the pending change timing pattern as the execution pattern of the corresponding display effect in the first specific period are determined. In the variable display start setting process executed corresponding to the start of the variable display, the active change pattern as the execution pattern of the corresponding display effect in the second specific period and the execution timing of the active display change are determined. But this is just one example. It may be configured to determine the execution pattern of the corresponding display effect throughout the specific period including the first specific period and the second specific period in response to the occurrence of the starting prize. In the execution pattern of the corresponding display effect, it is sufficient that the number of executions of the corresponding display change, the execution timing, the display mode of the corresponding display before and after each corresponding display change, and the like are specified.

In this case, as execution patterns of the corresponding display effects, an execution pattern serving as a first pattern in which the corresponding display effects are executed in at least the first specific period, and a second specific period in which the corresponding display effects are not executed in the first specific period. , and an execution pattern serving as a second pattern for executing the corresponding display effect in , may be prepared in advance, and the corresponding display effect may be configured to be executed in any one of these execution patterns. For example, when the corresponding display effect is executed when the normal mode is controlled, the corresponding display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. The ratio of executing the corresponding display effect in the execution pattern is high, and when the corresponding display effect is executed when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode, when it is controlled in the normal mode It may be configured such that the proportion of execution of the corresponding display effect in the second pattern is higher than when the corresponding display effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect. Furthermore, in this case, when the corresponding display effect is executed in the execution pattern which is the first pattern when the normal mode is controlled, it is the second pattern when the normal mode is controlled. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the corresponding display effect is executed in the execution pattern, and the corresponding display effect is performed in the execution pattern, which is the first pattern, when controlled in the color display expectation degree increasing mode. When the corresponding display performance is executed in the execution pattern which is the second pattern in the case of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when it is executed. It may be configured as According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the player is asked whether or not the corresponding display effect will be executed in the second specific period after the first specific period. It can attract attention and improve the performance effect.

At step 07AKS615, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the chance effect determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute is determined (step 07AKS615). Specifically, in the processing of step 07AKS615, either "no execution" in which the chance production is not executed or "execution" in which the chance production is executed at the determined ratio shown in the chance production determination table of FIG. 8-30. is determined by The currently controlled production mode may be specified based on which of the normal mode flag, the color display expectation level up mode flag, the color display premier mode flag, and the chance production up mode flag is set to the ON state. . The variable display result may be specified based on a variable display result notification command, which will be described later.

In the processing of step 07 AKS615, by determining whether or not to execute the chance production according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the chance presentation is determined so as to be. Further, in the process of step 07 AKS615, by determining whether or not to execute the chance effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. Percentage determined to execute chance production than when it is controlled in production modes other than chance production up mode ("other than chance production up mode") such as normal mode, color display expectation up mode, color display premier mode Whether or not to execute the chance presentation is determined so that the .

Returning to FIG. 8-27, after executing the process of step 07AKS615, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop design, etc., which will be the fixed decoration design as the variable display result of the decoration design (step 07AKS616). In the processing of step 07 AKS616, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Then, the final stop symbol may be determined. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted (transmitted) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS616, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern to be one of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 07AKS617). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command and uses it. set as a pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (chance effect control pattern) and sets it as a use pattern in response to the determination result of whether or not to execute the chance effect by the processing of step 07AKS615. do. In addition, the production control CPU 120 provides a plurality of production control patterns (special character production control pattern) and set it as a usage pattern. Whether or not to execute the special character effect and the type in the variable display to be started may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" in the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, the chance production control pattern, and the special character production control pattern, and one production control corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production A pattern may be set.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS617, the production control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, for example ( Step 07 AKS 618). After executing the processing of step 07AKS618, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 07AKS619). In the process of step 07AKS619, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation control pattern) determined in step 07AKS617 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 ( Transmission), etc., to start the variation of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Just do it. After executing the process of step 07AKS619, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 07AKS620), and then performs variable display start setting process. exit.

FIG. 8-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process shown in the flow chart of FIG.

When the production process during variable display is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has passed, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer. is determined (step 07AKS701). In the process of step 07 AKA701, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated by, for example, subtracting 1, and when the end code is read out from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated timer value, variable display is performed. It should be determined that the time has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 07AKS701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a ready-to-win effect execution period in which a ready-to-win effect such as a normal reach effect or a super ready-to-win effect is executed. (Step 07AKS702). Reach production execution period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 07AKS617 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect execution period (step 07AKS702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win effect (step 07AKS703).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS703, or when it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect execution period in step 07AKS702 (step 07AKS702; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the chance effect execution period in which the chance effect is executed. It is determined whether or not (step 07AKS704). The chance effect execution period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (chance effect control pattern) determined in step 07AKS617, for example. When it is determined that it is the chance production execution period (step 07AKS704; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs control to execute the chance production (step 07AKS705).

After executing the process of step 07AKS705, or when it is determined that it is not the chance production execution period in step 7AKS704 (step 07AKS704; No), the production control CPU 120 performs special effects such as the first special character production and the second special character production. It is determined whether or not it is the special character presentation execution period during which the character presentation is executed (step 07AKS706). The special character effect execution period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (special character effect control pattern) determined in step 07AKS617, for example. When it is determined that it is the special character effect execution period (step 07AKS706; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the special character effect (step 07AKS707).

After executing the process of step 07AKS707, or when it is determined in step 7AKS706 that it is not the special character effect execution period (step 07AKS706; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 07AKS613 of the variable display start setting process. It is determined whether or not it is time to change the active display (step 07AKS708). The execution timing of the active display change may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that it is time to execute the active display change (step 07AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display change (active display change) according to the active change pattern determined in step 07AKS612 of the variable display start setting process. (step 07AKS709). The active change pattern may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the suspension related data storage unit 07AKM1.

After executing the process of step 07AKS709, or when it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the active display change in step 07AKS708 (step 07AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern), control is performed to execute effects during variable display including variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 07AKS710), and the process during variable display ends.

In step 07AKS701, when it is determined that the variable display time has passed (step 07AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 07AKS711). . If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 07AKS711; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the pattern confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the pattern confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so.

In step 07AKS711, when it is determined that the design confirmation command has been received (step 07AKS711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, decorates In the variable display of symbols, control is performed to derive and display (stop display) the final stop symbol (determined ornamental symbol) as a result of variable display (step 07AKS712). After executing the processing of step 07AKS712, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 07AKS713), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process. It is updated to a certain "3" (step 07AKS714).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is "0" (step 07AKS715). If it is determined that the mode switching operation hold residual number count value is "0" (step 07AKS715; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the display of the mode switching preparation display (step 07AKS716). In the processing of step 07AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 clears the mode switching preparation display flag and sets it to the OFF state.

In the present embodiment, when one or a plurality of pending information are stored and the mode switching operation is performed while the variable display is being performed in a state where the total pending storage number is 1 or more (step 07AKS202; Yes ), the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is set to a value corresponding to the total pending storage number (step 07AKS208), and the mode switching notification based on the mode switching operation is completed (step 07AKS220), The display of the mode switching preparation in progress display is started (step 07AKS226), and thereafter the variable display ends in the state where the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is "0" (step 07AKS715; Yes). , the display of the mode switching preparation in progress display ends (step 07AKS716). With such a configuration, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation while the variable display is being executed in the state where the pending information is stored, the mode switching notification as the predetermined period ends. After the end of the variable display until the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored when the mode switching operation was performed, the mode switching preparing display is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the mode switching operation is performed while the variable display is performed in a state where the pending information is not stored and the total pending storage number is 0 (step 07AKS202; Yes) , the count value of the pending residual number at the time of the mode switching operation is set to "0" (step 07AKS208), and the mode switching notification based on the mode switching operation is completed (step 07AKS220). Display is started (step 07AKS226), and after that, mode switching is being prepared in response to the end of the variable display in the state where the count value of the pending residual number at the time of mode switching operation is "0" (step 07AKS715; Yes). The display of the display ends (step 07AKS716). With such a configuration, when the switching of the production mode is confirmed based on the mode switching operation when the variable display is executed in a state where the pending information is not stored, after the mode switching notification as the predetermined period is completed During the period until the end of the variable display, the mode switch preparing display is displayed.

After executing the processing of step 07AKS716, or in step 07AKS715, when it is determined that the mode switching operation pending residual number count value is not "0" (step 07AKS715; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to active display. In response to the end of the variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display is the object of the background change effect (step 07AKS717). Whether or not the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the background change effect may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the background change effect (step 07AKS717; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the background change effect (step 07AKS718). In the process of step 07AKS718, control for changing (returning) the background image from the special background image to the normal background image on the screen of the image display device 5 may be performed. Thus, the background change effect ends (step 07AKS718) when the variable display targeted for the background change effect ends (step 07AKS717; Yes).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS718 or when it is determined in step 07AKS717 that the variable display corresponding to the active display is not subject to the background change effect (step 07AKS717; No), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the active display. In response to the end of the variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display is the object of the win-time flash effect (step 07AKS719). Whether or not the variable display corresponding to the active display is the object of the win-time flash effect may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the win-time flash effect (step 07AKS719; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the win-time flash effect (step 07AKS720). Thus, the win-time flash effect ends (step 07AKS720) when the variable display targeted for the win-time flash effect ends (step 07AKS719; Yes).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS720, or when it is determined in step 07AKS719 that the variable display corresponding to the active display is not the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (step 07AKS719; No), the effect control CPU 120 changes to the active display. In response to the end of the corresponding variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display is the object of the corresponding display lamp effect (step 07AKS721). Whether or not the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the corresponding display lamp effect may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the pending related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the corresponding display lamp effect (step 07AKS721; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the corresponding display lamp effect (step 07AKS722). Thus, the corresponding display lamp effect ends (step 07AKS722) when the variable display targeted for the corresponding display lamp effect ends (step 07AKS721; Yes).

After executing the processing of step 07AKS722, or when it is determined in step 07AKS721 that the variable display corresponding to the active display is not the object of the corresponding display lamp effect (step 07AKS721; No), the effect control CPU 120 changes to the active display. In response to the end of the corresponding variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display is the target of the premium effect (step 07AKS723). Whether or not the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the premium effect may be specified based on the storage contents of the storage area corresponding to the buffer number "0" of the reservation related data storage unit 07AKM1. When it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the active display is the target of the premium effect (step 07AKS723; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the premium effect (step 07AKS724). Thus, the premium effect ends (step 07AKS724) when the variable display targeted for the premium effect ends (step 07AKS723; Yes).

After executing the process of step 07AKS724, or when it is determined in step 07AKS723 that the variable display corresponding to the active display is not subject to the premium effect (step 07AKS723; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect process during variable display. exit.

8-32 to 8-34, an example of the effect operation related to the characteristic portion 007AK will be described below. Concretely, an effect operation example in the case where the starting prize is generated three times in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode will be described below.

FIG. 8-32(A) shows the decorative pattern displays of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode. It shows a state in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32(A), the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in "white" as the normal display mode in the active display area 07AKA1. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32(A), in the mode display area 07AKC1, mode notification is performed to notify that control is being performed in the color display expectation degree increasing mode. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32(A), the background change effect is not executed, and the normal background image representing the scenery of the daytime sky is displayed as the background image on the screen of the image display device 5. . In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 8-32(A), neither the winning flash effect nor the corresponding display lamp effect is performed, and the first starting winning hole lamp 9A is turned off.

In the state shown in FIG. 8-32(A), the first starting prize is generated, and the flash effect at the time of weak winning is executed for the variable display based on the first starting prize, and in the variable display. A case where the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed will be described as an example. Specifically, below, in the super ready-to-win effect in the variable display based on the first start winning, after the battle effect is executed, the defeat effect is executed as the win/loss effect, and the losing pattern is displayed stopped as the display result of the variable display. A case will be described as an example.

In FIG. 8-32(B), the flash effect at the time of weak winning is started for the variable display based on the first start winning, and the flash effect sound at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It shows a state in which the 1 start winning opening lamp 9A is lit in purple. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the first start winning is displayed in the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 07AKB1, It is displayed in "white" as a normal display mode.

In FIG. 8-32(C), in the variable display corresponding to the active display (the variable display executed in FIG. 8-32(A)), the chance effect is executed for the variable display, The screen of the image display device 5 shows a state in which an animation showing how a predetermined chance character dances is displayed.

FIG. 8-32(D) shows, as a display result of the variable display corresponding to the active display, a losing combination ("135" ) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 8-32(E), variable display of decorative patterns based on the first start winning is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. state. In the state shown in Figure 8-32(E), the pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the first start winning that was displayed in Figures 8-32(B) to 8-32(D) is erased. On the other hand, the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in "white" in the active display area 07AKA1.

In the following, an example will be described in which a second start-up winning occurs in the state shown in FIG. .

In FIG. 8-32 (F), the background change effect for the variable display based on the second starting prize has started, and the night sky scenery is displayed as the background image on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows a state in which a special background image representing the image is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32 (F), the pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the second start winning is displayed in the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 07AKB1, Displayed in "white".

In FIG. 8-32 (G), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display based on the first start winning, and the effect image showing the message "reach!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows a state where In the present embodiment, during a period in which a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect is being executed, the decorative pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-32(G). At the position, it is displayed in a display size smaller than the display size during the period when the ready-to-win effect is not executed. In the state shown in FIG. 8-32(G), when the variable display of the decorative design is executed in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L are displayed. , and 5C, the same decorative symbols ("4") are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state, thereby establishing the ready-to-win state.

In FIG. 8-32(H), in the variable display based on the first starting prize, a battle effect as a super ready-to-win effect is being executed, and a predetermined main character and a predetermined enemy are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. This shows a state in which an animation is displayed showing how a character fights.

In FIG. 8-33(A), in the variable display based on the first starting prize, a defeat effect is executed as a super ready-to-win effect, and the main character is defeated by the enemy character on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows a state in which an animation representing the state is displayed.

FIG. 8-33(B) shows, as a display result of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning, a losing combination ( "484") is displayed in a stopped state.

In FIG. 8-33(C), variable display of decorative patterns based on the second start winning is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. state. In the state shown in FIG. 8-33(C), the pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the second start winning that was displayed in FIGS. 8-32(G) to 8-33(B) is erased. On the other hand, the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in "white" in the active display area 07AKA1. In the state shown in FIG. 8-33(C), variable based on the first start winning to be targeted for the flash effect at the time of weak winning executed in FIGS. 8-32(B) to 8-33(B) Corresponding to the end of the display, the flash effect at the time of weak winning has ended, and the first start winning opening lamp 9A has been extinguished.

Thereafter, in the state shown in FIG. A case in which the corresponding display lamp effect is executed for display will be described as an example. Specifically, below, for the variable display based on the third start winning, the display mode of the hold display is held by the character hold change pattern PQ01 (see FIG. 8-23 (A)) in which the display mode does not change from "white character". As an example, the active display effect is executed according to the active change pattern PS08 (see FIG. 8-28(B)) in which the display mode of the active display changes from “white character” to “blue” as the effect is executed. will be used for explanation. More specifically, below, the pending display effect is executed by the pending change timing pattern PR01 (see FIG. 8-24 (A)) in which the display mode of the pending display does not change (the change timing of the pending display is 0 times). , the execution timing of the active display change in the active display effect is the timing 07AKT3 (see FIG. 8-4(B)), which is the same timing as the timing at which the ready-to-win state is established. Further, in the variable display based on the occurrence of the third starting prize, the first special character effect is executed as a effect corresponding to the pending display of "white character", and after the normal reach effect is executed, the super reach effect is executed. A description will be given using an example in which a production is executed. Specifically, in the following, in the super ready-to-win effect in the variable display based on the third starting prize, after the battle effect is executed, the victory effect is executed as the win/loss effect, and as the display result of the variable display, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. A case will be described as an example.

FIG. 8-33(D) is for the variable display based on the third starting prize, and corresponds to the variable display by executing the pending display effect (holding display change) in the character holding change pattern PQ01. This shows a state where the pending display is displayed as a "white character" at the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 07AKB1. In the state shown in FIG. 8-33 (D), in response to the change of the variable display based on the third starting prize to the "white character" as a special display mode, the corresponding display lamp for the variable display The effect has started, and the first start winning entrance lamp 9A is blinking in white (lights up in a light emission mode corresponding to "white character").

FIG. 8-33(E) shows, as a display result of the variable display corresponding to the third starting prize, a losing combination ( "495") is displayed in a stopped state.

In FIG. 8-33(F), variable display of decorative patterns based on the third start winning is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. state. In the state shown in Fig. 8-33(F), the pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the third starting prize displayed in Fig. 8-33(D) and Fig. 8-33(E) is erased. On the other hand, the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 07AKA1 in "white character". In the state shown in FIG. 8-33 (F), the variable display based on the second start winning, which is the target of the background change effect executed in FIGS. 8-32 (F) to 8-33 (E). Corresponding to the end, the background change effect is ended, and the normal background image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the background image.

In FIG. 8-33(G), in the variable display based on the third starting prize, the first special character effect is executed for the variable display, and on the screen of the image display device 5, "white character ” shows a state in which an animation showing how the first special character dances is displayed.

In FIG. 8-33 (H), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display based on the third start winning, and the effect image showing the message "reach!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows a state where In the state shown in FIG. 8-33(H), the decoration pattern is positioned at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 and the ready-to-win effect is not being executed, corresponding to the ready-to-win effect being executed. It is displayed in a display size smaller than the display size in the period. In the state shown in FIG. 8-33(H), when variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L are displayed. , and 5C, the same decorative symbols ("2") are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbols are in a ready-to-win mode, thereby establishing a ready-to-win state. In the state shown in FIG. 8-33 (H), at timing 07AKT3, which is the same timing as the timing at which reach is established, the variable display based on the third start winning is targeted for the active display effect ( Active display change) is executed, so that the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in "blue". In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 8-33 (H), the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the third start winning, which is the target of the corresponding display lamp effect, has changed to "blue". , the light emission mode of the first start prize winning opening lamp 9A is updated to a light emitting mode corresponding to "blue", and the first start winning prize opening lamp 9A is lit in blue.

In FIG. 8-34(A), in the variable display based on the third starting prize, a battle effect as a super ready-to-win effect is being executed, and on the screen of the image display device 5, the main character and the enemy character are fighting. It shows a state in which an animation showing how to perform is displayed.

In FIG. 8-34(B), in the variable display based on the third starting prize, a victory effect as a super ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the main character wins over the enemy character on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows a state in which an animation representing the state is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that is a variable display result of the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from the stop display, and then the fixed decorative pattern is displayed. Configured to display stop. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols that form the jackpot combination are displayed as a variable display result of the decorative patterns, the control to the jackpot game state is completed after the decorative patterns that form the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured not to perform various effects related to the effect mode, such as mode notification in the mode display area 07AKC1, during the period until the control is performed to the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance related to the control to the big hit game state from being hindered by the performance related to the performance mode, thereby improving the performance effect. In addition, when the decorative symbols that result in a losing combination as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, various effects related to the effect mode such as mode notification in the mode display area 07AKC1 are not limited.

FIG. 8-34 (C) shows that in the variable display corresponding to the third start winning, the jackpot combination ("222 ”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 8-34(C), the mode notification in the mode display area 07AKC1 is erased based on the stationary display of the decorative symbols that form the winning combination. FIG. 8-34 (D) shows that in the variable display corresponding to the third start winning, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are shown in FIG. 8-34 ( C) shows a state in which the decoration symbols of the big hit combination temporarily stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that during the period in which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, in the mode display area 07AKC1, various effects related to the effect mode such as mode notification may be restricted so as not to be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the super ready-to-win effect from being hindered by the effect related to the effect mode, thereby improving the effect of the effect. Alternatively, a production mode related to the production for the variable display being executed (variable display corresponding to the active display), or a production mode related to the production that can be executed during the period when the super reach production is being executed. When the performance mode highly related to the medium variable display is controlled, the performance related to the performance mode such as the mode notification in the mode display area 07AKC1 is not restricted during the period in which the super ready-to-win performance is executed. On the other hand, it is controlled to a production mode that is less relevant to the variable display being executed, such as a production mode related to the pre-reading notice production and a production mode related to production that is not executed during the period in which the super reach production is being executed. In this case, the effect related to the effect mode in the mode display area 07AKC1 may be restricted during the period in which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, it is possible for the player to grasp the information regarding the effect mode that is highly relevant to the variable display being executed. It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the super ready-to-win effect by the effect related to the effect mode having low relevance to the variable display, and improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, on the screen of the image display device 5, a specific mode display area different from the mode display area 07AKC1 is provided, and in the specific mode display area, the specific mode notification for notifying the effect mode currently being controlled is always executed. can be configured to According to such a configuration, the player can always grasp the production mode. The specific mode display area may be provided at a position that is less conspicuous (difficult to recognize) than the mode display area 07AKC1, such as the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. In addition, in the specific mode display area, it is preferable not to perform the effect related to the effect mode different from the specific mode notification, such as the display of the mode switching notification and the mode switching preparation display. According to such a configuration, the player can always grasp the production mode.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the color display expectation increase mode (2 When the color-corresponding display effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the effect state), the ratio (win expectation) of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player is higher. expensive. In addition, in the characteristic part 007AK, an effect that can be executed for the variable display that is the target of the corresponding display effect (suggestive effect), and is a win-time flash effect (predetermined effect) that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state , a flash performance at the time of weak winning (first predetermined performance), and a flash performance at the time of strong winning, in which the rate of control in an advantageous state (expectation for winning) is higher than the flash performance at the time of weak winning, can be executed. . Further, the characteristic part 007AK is configured to be able to limit the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled and the color-based display effect is not executed, the control is performed in an advantageous state even though the flash effect at the time of strong winning is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being spoiled and to improve the performance effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the effect mode can be switched based on the mode switching operation (selection operation) performed by the player on the cross key 33 as the operation means that the player can operate. ing. For example, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the level of expectation for color display is increased from the normal mode based on the mode switching operation (selection operation) performed by the player on the cross key 33 as operation means that the player can operate. Mode is configured to be controllable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to set the production mode (production state) according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, the characteristic part 007AK is configured so as not to limit the execution of the flash effect at the time of weak winning when the display effect corresponding to the color (suggestive effect) is not executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. . According to such a configuration, in a situation where the execution of the flash effect at the time of a strong prize is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to an excessive decrease in the execution frequency (execution ratio) of the flash effect at the time of the prize winning. , it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the normal mode is controlled, and when the control is in the advantageous state, the control is performed in the color display expectation level up mode rather than when the winning flash effect is executed, and in the advantageous state. When the winning flash effect is executed in the case of being controlled, the ratio of executing the effect corresponding to the color display is higher. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation when the winning flash effect is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the control is performed in the color display premier mode (third effect state) rather than when the color corresponding display effect (suggestion effect) is executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the color-based display effect is executed when the color is present. Further, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the color-based display effect is not executed when the color display expectation increase mode is controlled, the flash effect at the time of weak winning can be executed, and the color display premier mode is controlled. In this case, when the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed, it is configured to be restricted so that the flash effect at the time of weak winning is not executed. According to such a configuration, when the color display premium mode is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and reduce the interest in the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the corresponding display effect (suggestion effect) can be executed at least one of a plurality of timings within the specific period within the specific period, and the specific period includes the first specific period and the second specific period. and a second specific period after the first specific period. Further, in the characteristic part 007AK, the corresponding display effect is divided into a first pattern in which the corresponding display effect is executed at least in the first specific period, and a corresponding display effect in the second specific period without executing the corresponding display effect in the first specific period. and a second pattern for executing Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the color corresponding display effect (suggestion effect) is executed when the normal mode is controlled, the color corresponding display effect is executed when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. When the ratio of execution of the corresponding display effect in the execution pattern that is the first pattern is higher than when is executed, and the color corresponding display effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the color display expectation increasing mode. In this case, the ratio of executing the corresponding display effect in the second pattern is higher than when the color corresponding display effect is executed in the case of being controlled in the normal mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the corresponding display effect is executed in the first pattern when the normal mode is controlled, the corresponding display effect is executed in the second pattern when the normal mode is controlled. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when is executed, and the color display expectation is higher than when the corresponding display effect is executed in the first pattern when being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode. When the corresponding display effect is executed in the second pattern when being controlled to the up mode, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher. According to such a configuration, when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the player is asked whether or not the corresponding display effect will be executed in the second specific period after the first specific period. It can attract attention and improve the performance effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 007AK, the number of timings within a specific period in which the active display effect (suggestive effect) can be executed when the normal mode is controlled is higher when the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled. The number of timings within a specific period in which active display effects can be executed is smaller. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

In addition, the characteristic part 007AK is configured to be capable of executing a winning/losing effect (notification effect) that notifies whether or not control is performed in an advantageous state at a specific timing within a specific period, and at substantially the same timing as the specific timing. At timing 07AKT5 (special timing), an active display effect (suggestion effect) can be executed. Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the active display effect is executed when the color display premier mode is controlled than when the active display effect is executed when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled. , the rate at which the active display effect is executed at the timing 07AKT5 is higher. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation when the win/lose effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the color display premier mode.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the color-based display effect (suggestive effect) is executed when the color display premier mode is set, control is performed in an advantageous state, and the color-based display effect is terminated after the start. A premier performance (special performance) for deterministically notifying that the control is in an advantageous state can be executed in the period until the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the color-based display effect is executed in the color display premier mode, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, as corresponding display effects (suggestive effects), a color-dependent display effect (a first-type suggestive effect) and a character-dependent display effect (a second-type suggestive effect) different from the color-dependent display effect are displayed. and are configured to be executable. In addition, in the characteristic part 007AK, in a predetermined period after the switching of the production mode is notified by the mode switching notification, it is possible to display a mode switching preparation display (switching suggestion display) that suggests that the production mode after switching is controlled. is configured to For example, in a predetermined period after the mode switching notification indicates that the normal mode will be controlled to the increased color display expectation mode, a mode switching preparing display indicating that the mode will be controlled to the increased color display expectation mode is displayed. configured as possible. Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the start condition (execution condition) of the variable display is satisfied during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed, the color reservation display for the variable display is performed within the predetermined period. It is configured not to limit the execution of the effect (first type suggestive effect), but not to limit the execution of the character pending display effect (second type suggestive effect) for the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect mode after switching will be controlled based on the display during preparation for mode switching. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing interest in the game due to the execution of the color reservation display effect during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the execution of the pending display effect from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the color display expectation increasing mode is controlled, the ratio of execution of the color pending display effect (first type suggestive effect) is lower than when the normal mode is controlled. , the rate at which the character pending display effect (second type suggestive effect) is executed is higher than in the case of being controlled in the normal mode. According to such a configuration, in the state of being controlled in the color display expectation increasing mode, even though the color reservation display effect is executed, the control is not performed in an advantageous state, and the player's expectation is spoiled. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the excessive restriction of execution of the pending display effect (suggestion effect).

Further, the characteristic portion 007AK is configured to be able to restrict the switching of the effect mode, for example, control from the color display expectation degree increasing mode to the normal mode during a predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to frequent switching of the production mode (production state).

In addition, in the characteristic part 007AK, as the character-based display effect (second type suggestive effect), a red character using a specific display element (color different from white) common to the color-based display effect (first type suggestive effect) is used. A suspension display effect (suggestion effect of the first display mode) and a white character suspension display effect (suggestion effect of the second display mode) not using the specific display element are configured to be executable. Further, the characteristic portion 007AK is configured so as to restrict the execution of the red character pending display effect while not restricting the execution of the white character pending display effect during the predetermined period during which the mode switching preparation display is displayed. According to such a configuration, by executing the pending display effect (suggestive effect) in a display mode similar to the color-based display effect, it is possible to suppress the player's misunderstanding and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 007AK, the color-adaptive display effect (suggestion) is made in any of a plurality of modes at different determination ratios depending on whether the normal mode is controlled or the color display expectation-increasing mode is controlled. production) can be determined. In addition, in the characteristic part 007AK, after the start condition (execution condition) of the variable display is established when the control is performed in one production mode, the one production is executed based on the mode switching operation performed by the player. When control is performed from a mode to another presentation mode, and when the color-based display presentation targeting the variable display is started when being controlled in the other presentation mode, the control is performed in the one presentation mode. It is configured to be able to decide in which of a plurality of modes the color-based display effect is to be executed in accordance with the determination ratio in . For example, after the conditions for starting the variable display are established in the normal mode, control is performed from the normal mode to the color display expectation increasing mode based on the mode switching operation (selection operation) performed by the player. Then, when the color-based display performance for the variable display is started under control in the color display expectation increasing mode, any one of a plurality of types of modes is selected according to the determination ratio in the case of control under the normal mode. , the color-based display effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden caused by switching the production mode (production state).

Further, in the characteristic portion 007AK, when the color display premier mode is controlled, the color reserved display effect (first type suggestive effect) is executed more than when the color display expectation level up mode is controlled. is lower, and the rate at which the character pending display effect (second type suggestive effect) is executed is lower when it is controlled in the color display premier mode than when it is controlled in the color display expectation increase mode. is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the pending display effect (suggestive effect) is executed while being controlled to the color display premier mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 007AK, when the color display premier mode is controlled and the character pending display effect (second type suggestive effect) is executed, the normal mode or the color display expectation level up mode is controlled. In this case, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the character suspension display effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the character suspension display effect is executed while being controlled to the color display premium mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, it may be configured to be controllable to the time-saving state (low probability high base state) based on the execution of the variable display of the predetermined upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state. The upper limit number may be set in advance to 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the jackpot probability when it is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state). For example, if the jackpot probability under normal control is 1/300, the upper limit number of times is 750 to 900, which is 2.5 to 3 times 300, which is the denominator of the jackpot probability. is set in advance.

Specifically, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, etc., a variation number counter capable of counting the number of times of the variable display executed until the jackpot game state is executed is provided, and the variation number counter is counted every time the variable display is executed. The change number count value, which is a stored value, is updated by adding 1, and control to the time saving state is performed based on the fact that the change number count value after updating matches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times. In this case, based on being controlled to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation number counter is cleared, and the fluctuation number count value may be set to "0". Also, in this case, when it is controlled to the normal state or the time-saving state, it is updated by adding 1 to the change count value each time the variable display is executed, and when it is controlled to the normal state or the time-saving state While counting the number of times of the executed variable display, when it is controlled to the probability variable state (high probability high base state), even if the variable display is executed, the variable count value is not updated, and it is controlled to the probability variable state. The number of times of variable display that is executed when the device is on may be configured so as not to be counted.

It should be noted that, in the initialization process executed in step S8 of the game control main process, the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 are cleared based on the RAM clear process being performed, the variation counter is cleared. , the change number count value should be set to "0" as an initial value. It should be noted that when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power outage), the fluctuation counter is not cleared, and data protection processing of the RAM 102 is executed in the power supply stop processing. It is desirable to back up the variation count value.

When the time-saving state is controlled based on the variable display of the upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display of a predetermined number of times of time-saving (for example, 100 times) is executed after being controlled to the time-saving state. or the timing when the display result of the special game becomes a ``big hit'' and the timing is controlled to the big win game state, whichever comes first, the control to the time saving state is finished and the control is made to the normal state. In addition, after controlling to the time saving state based on the variable display of the upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state, RAM clear processing in the initialization processing executed in step S8 of the game control main processing is performed, the control to the time saving state should be terminated and the control to the normal state may be performed.

In addition, if it is controlled to the time saving state based on the variable display of the upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state, even after being controlled to the time saving state, before being controlled to the time saving state It is configured to continue to control the production mode (normal mode, color display expectation mode, color display premium mode, chance production mode, etc.), and when it is not controlled to the time saving state during the time saving state Whether or not to execute the corresponding display effect and the final display mode may be determined by a ratio different from the above. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, variable display is performed when control is performed in an effect mode different from the normal mode, which is the default effect mode, such as the color display expectation level up mode, the color display premier mode, and the chance effect up mode. Based on the fact that a predetermined reset selection effect waiting time (for example, 1 minute) has passed without any operation (without the game being executed), it is selected (determined) whether or not to perform the reset setting for controlling to the normal mode. A reset selection effect prompting the player may be configured to be executable. In the reset selection effect, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a message "Do you want to reset customization?" By displaying the corresponding effect image, the player may be prompted to select whether or not to perform the reset setting. Specifically, in the reset selection effect, an effect image showing a message "Yes" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as an effect image corresponding to the selection to perform the reset setting, corresponding to the selection not to perform the reset setting. The effect image representing the message "No" may be displayed as the effect image.

When the reset selection effect is being executed, the player presses the cross key 33, for example, to display the effect corresponding to the selection for reset setting displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Either the image (the effect image representing the message "Yes") or the effect image corresponding to the selection not to perform the reset setting (the effect image representing the message "No") may be selectable. When the player selects the effect image corresponding to the selection for the reset setting while the reset selection effect is being executed, the effect mode is switched from the currently controlled effect mode to the normal mode, and the reset selection effect is executed. You should finish. On the other hand, when the player selects an effect image corresponding to a selection for which the reset setting is not performed while the reset selection effect is being executed, the reset selection is made without switching the effect mode from the currently controlled effect mode. The performance should be finished.

With such a configuration, after the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to an effect mode different from the normal mode which is the default effect mode based on the mode switching operation performed by the one player, the one player starts the game. When the game is finished and leaves the seat, and then another player starts the game by the pachinko game machine 1, the other player receives a reset selection effect to make the pachinko game machine 1 different from the normal mode. It is possible to select whether or not to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the normal mode by recognizing that it is controlled in the mode and performing the reset setting. According to such a configuration, after the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the performance mode different from the normal mode based on the mode switching operation performed by the one player, the one player ends the game and leaves. After that, another player starts the game by the pachinko game machine 1 without recognizing that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled in a performance mode different from the normal mode, and the game is played between the players. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the fairness of the game and the decrease in the interest in the game.

After the reset selection effect is started, neither the effect image corresponding to the selection to perform the reset setting nor the effect image corresponding to the selection not to perform the reset setting is selected for a predetermined reset standby time ( For example, based on the fact that two minutes) has elapsed, the production mode may be switched from the currently controlled production mode to the normal mode, and the reset selection production may be terminated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the fairness between players from being impaired and the interest in the game from being lowered.

In addition, as described above, it is configured to be controllable to the time saving state based on the fact that the variable display of the upper limit number of times is executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and in the normal state to the production mode different from the normal mode When it is controlled, if it is controlled to a performance mode different from the normal mode in the variable probability state, it is controlled to the time saving state based on the end of the jackpot game state, and is controlled to the performance mode different from the normal mode. When it is controlled to the time saving state based on the variable display of the upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and when it is controlled to the production mode different from the normal mode Alternatively, the reset selection effect may be executed based on the lapse of the reset selection effect waiting time without execution of the variable display. In this form, when it is controlled to a production mode different from the normal mode in the normal state, when it is controlled to a production mode different from the normal mode in the variable probability state, and based on the end of the jackpot game state It is controlled to the time-saving state and is controlled to the time-saving state based on the case where it is controlled to the production mode different from the normal mode and the variable display of the upper limit number of times without being controlled to the jackpot game state. , and when it is controlled in a production mode different from the normal mode, different times are set as the reset selection production waiting time until the reset selection production is started. good.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect mode may be switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is not being performed. With such a configuration, convenience for the player can be improved. In this form, when the effect mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is not being executed, the mode is changed on the screen of the image display device 5 while the variable display is being executed. It is also possible to notify the switching of the performance mode (notify the performance mode after switching) in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the case where the performance mode is switched based on the switching operation being performed. good. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the performance mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed when the variable display is not being executed, and the convenience for the player is improved. can be improved. For example, when the effect mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is being performed, a predetermined By displaying the message in the first size of , the switching of the effect mode is notified and the effect mode after switching is notified. On the other hand, when the effect mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is not being executed, the player is positioned closer to the center of the image display device 5 than the position where the mode display area 07AKC1 is provided. By displaying a message in a predetermined second size larger than the first size at a position that is easily recognized by the player, the switching of the performance mode and the performance mode after the switching may be notified.

In addition, when the variable display is being executed, the effect mode may be switched by a simpler operation than when the variable display is not being executed. With such a configuration, convenience for the player can be improved. For example, when the variable display is being performed, the effect mode may be switched based on the fact that the player has performed a smaller number of operations than when the variable display is not being performed. Specifically, when the variable display is not executed, the player performs an operation to select the effect mode after switching (for example, an operation of pressing the cross key 33), and then an operation to confirm the change of the effect mode. (For example, an operation of pressing the push button 31B) is configured to switch the production mode based on the performance, while the player selects the production mode after switching when the variable display is executed. The effect mode may be switched based on the operation (for example, the operation of pressing the cross key 33). That is, when the variable display is not executed, the effect mode is switched based on the fact that the player performs two operations (operation to select the effect mode after switching, operation to confirm the change of the effect mode). On the other hand, when the variable display is executed, the performance mode may be switched based on one operation (operation to select the performance mode after switching) performed by the player.

When the player is not playing the game and the variable display is not being executed, the volume of the effect sound such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to It is preferable to set it to a lower volume than when it is running. When the player is not playing the game and the variable display is not being executed, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to "0", for example, to produce an effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may be configured so that no sound is output. In these cases, if the production mode is switched based on the mode switching operation performed when the variable display is not executed, the selection of the production mode after switching is determined (confirmed), and the production mode In response to the confirmation of the switching, the production mode is switched by outputting a confirmation sound, which is a prescribed production sound, from the speakers 8L and 8R at a prescribed first volume, and the production mode after switching. What is necessary is just to report that it is controlled. On the other hand, when the production mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is being executed, the selection of the production mode after switching is determined, and the switching of the production mode is confirmed. In response, the confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a second volume smaller than the first volume described above, thereby switching the production mode and notifying that the production mode after switching is controlled. do it. According to such a configuration, the performance sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the various performances executed during the variable display are drowned out by the confirmation sounds, thereby lowering the performance effect and reducing the interest in the game. You can suppress the decline. It should be noted that, when the effect mode is switched based on the mode switching operation being performed while the variable display is being executed, the confirmation sound may not be output. According to such a configuration, the performance sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the various performances executed during the variable display are drowned out by the confirmation sounds, thereby lowering the performance effect and reducing the interest in the game. You can suppress the decline.

In the above embodiment, when restricting execution of a specific effect such as a corresponding display effect or a winning flash effect, in the process of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect, it is determined not to execute the specific effect. By doing so, the specific effect may be restricted not to be executed, or the specific effect may be restricted not to be executed by not performing the process itself for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect. good. Alternatively, after executing a process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect, by overwriting the decision result of the process with a decision not to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is restricted so that it is not executed. good too.

In the above-described embodiment, when restricting execution of a specific effect such as a corresponding display effect or a winning flash effect, presence or absence of the restriction may be changed depending on whether it is a specific period. For example, during a period from when the effect mode is switched as a specific period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), if the color display expectation level increasing mode is controlled, the color correspondence When the display effect is not executed, the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning is restricted, while during a period different from the specific period, when the color display expectation degree increasing mode is controlled, the display effect corresponding to the color is not executed. Sometimes, the execution of the flash effect at the time of strong winning may not be restricted. Alternatively, during the period during which the variable probability state is controlled as a specific period, while restricting the execution of the color-based display effect when the mode switching preparation display is displayed, during a period different from the specific period Alternatively, the execution of the color correspondence display effect may not be restricted when the mode switching preparation in progress display is displayed.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any way.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 007AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 007AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
A first effect state (for example, a state of being controlled in a normal mode) is a different effect state from the first effect state, and the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the same as the first effect state. 2 production states (for example, the state of being controlled to the color display expectation level up mode, etc.), production state control means (for example, FIGS. 8-10 to 8-12, etc.) that can be controlled,
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, FIGS. 8-27, Figure 8-34, etc.) and
with
The advantageous state is obtained when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the control is performed in the first performance state. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that can be executed for the variable display that is the target of the suggestive effect, and that is capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state 8-13, 8-15, 8-32, 8-33, etc.),
The predetermined effect executing means has, as the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of weak winning) and a second predetermined effect (for example, It is possible to execute (for example, flash performance at the time of strong winning) and (for example, FIG. 8-15),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the execution of the second predetermined effect can be restricted (for example, FIG. 8-15),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the control is not performed to the advantageous state even though the second predetermined effect is executed, and the player's It is possible to prevent the expectation from being spoiled and improve the performance effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
An operation means (for example, cross key 33 etc.) that can be operated by the player is further provided,
It is possible to control from the first effect state to the second effect state based on the selection operation (for example, mode switching operation) performed by the player on the operation means (for example, FIGS. Figure 8-12, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to set the effect state according to the taste of the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine (1) or (2) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the execution of the first predetermined effect is not restricted (for example, FIG. 8-15),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in a situation where the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the predetermined effect, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game. can.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
When it is controlled to the first effect state and is controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second effect state and is controlled to the advantageous state rather than when the predetermined effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state When the predetermined effect is executed at the time, the ratio of the suggestive effect to be executed is higher (for example, FIG. 8-15 etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation when the predetermined effect is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
The suggestive effect executing means has a first mode (e.g., "blue") and a second mode (e.g., "green", "red", etc.) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode. , the suggestive effect can be executed in any of a plurality of modes including (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-18, etc.),
It is controlled to the second effect state, and when the predetermined effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio at which the suggestive effect is executed in the first mode is higher than the second effect. Higher than the rate at which the suggested production is executed in the mode,
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is executed in the first mode in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is lower than that in the second mode, the player's sense of expectation is maintained and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the first predetermined effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 8-15 etc.),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the third effect state is controlled, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 8-15),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the third effect state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and reduce the interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at least one of a plurality of timings within a specific period (for example, FIGS. 8-4, 8-24, 8-27, and 8-29 , Figure 8-31, etc.),
The specific period includes a first specific period and a second specific period after the first specific period (eg, FIG. 8-4, etc.),
The suggestive effect executing means performs the suggestive effect in a first pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed at least in the first specific period, and in the second specific period without executing the suggestive effect in the first specific period. It can be executed in one of the execution patterns of the second pattern for executing the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, etc.),
The first pattern is executed when the suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The ratio of execution of the suggestive effect at is high (for example, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
The second pattern is executed when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled than when the suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled. At a high rate of execution of the suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
When the suggestive effect is executed in the first pattern when the first effect state is controlled, the suggestive effect is executed in the second pattern when the first effect state is controlled. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the production is executed (eg, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
The suggestive performance is executed in the second pattern when the second performance state is controlled more than when the suggestive performance is executed in the first pattern when the second performance state is controlled. is executed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher (for example, FIG. 8-19),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the second effect state is controlled, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second specific period after the first specific period, It is possible to improve the performance effect.

(9) In the gaming machine of (7) or (8) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
Said suggestive effect can be executed when controlled to said second effect state is greater than the number of timings within said specific period in which said suggestive effect can be executed when controlled to said first effect state. The number of timings within a specific period is smaller (eg, Figure 8-29),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, winning/losing effect, etc.) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled at a specific timing within the specific period (for example, FIGS. 8-4, 8-5, and 8-31 ~ Figure 8-34 etc.),
The suggestive effect can be executed at a special timing (for example, timing 07AKT5) that is substantially the same timing as the specific timing (for example, FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-29, etc.),
At the special timing, the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The ratio of execution of the suggestive effect is high (for example, FIG. 8-29, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation when the notification effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the third effect state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
When the suggestive performance is executed while being controlled to the third performance state, it is controlled to the advantageous state, and is controlled to the advantageous state during the period from the start to the end of the suggestive performance. It is possible to execute a special effect (eg, premium effect) that definitely notifies that (eg, FIGS. 8-10, 8-18, 8-26, 8-31, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the special feeling when the suggestive effect is executed in the third effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The suggestive effect execution means is configured to, as the suggestive effects, a first type of suggestive effect (for example, a color-based display effect) and a second type of suggestive effect (for example, a character-based display effect) different from the first type of suggestive effect (for example, a character-based display effect). etc.) and can be executed (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-17 to FIG.
The first type suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled more than the first type suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled. When the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, FIG. 8-18 etc.),
In a predetermined period after notification of the control from the first effect state to the second effect state, a switching suggestion display (for example, mode switching preparation display, etc.) suggesting control to the second effect state. can be displayed (for example, Figures 8-8 to 8-12, Figure 8-27, etc.),
When a variable display execution condition (e.g., a start condition) is satisfied during the predetermined period, the execution of the first type suggestive effect for the variable display is restricted within the predetermined period, and the variable display is performed. Do not limit the execution of the second type of suggestive effect for
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the control to the second effect state is performed based on the switching suggestion display. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing interest in the game due to the execution of the first type suggestive effect during the predetermined period in which the switch suggestive display is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the execution of the suggestive effect from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the decrease in the effect of the effect.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
When being controlled to the second effect state, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect of the first type is lower than when being controlled to the first effect state, while being controlled to the first effect state. The ratio of execution of the second type suggestive effect is higher than when there is (for example, FIG. 8-19),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in the state of being controlled to the second effect state, even though the suggestive effect of the first type is executed, the advantageous state is not controlled, and the player's expectation is spoiled. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the excessive restriction on the execution of the suggestive effect.

(14) In the gaming machine (12) or (13) above relating to the characteristic part 007AK,
It is possible to limit the control from the second rendering state to the first rendering state in the predetermined period (for example, FIGS. 8-8, 8-11, 8-12, 8-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to frequent switching of the presentation state.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (14) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The suggestive effect executing means uses, as the second type of suggestive effect, a suggestive effect (e.g., red character pending display effect, etc.) and a suggestive effect of the second display mode that does not use the specific display element (for example, white character pending display effect, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-3, 8-19, Figure 8-20, etc.),
In the predetermined period, while restricting the execution of the suggestive effect of the first display mode, not restricting the execution of the suggestive effect of the second display mode (for example, FIGS. 8-19, 8-20, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, by executing the suggestive display effect in a display mode similar to the first type of suggestive effect, it is possible to suppress the player's misunderstanding and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-18, etc.),
It is possible to determine in which of the plurality of modes the suggestive effect is to be executed at different determination ratios depending on whether the first effect state is controlled or the second effect state is controlled. Yes (e.g. Figures 8-18),
After the condition for executing variable display (for example, starting condition) is satisfied when the control is performed in the first effect state, the player performs the selection operation (for example, mode switching operation). Control is performed from the first rendering state to the second rendering state, and when the suggestive rendering targeting the variable display is started when being controlled to the second rendering state, it is controlled to the first rendering state. It is possible to decide in which of the plurality of modes the suggestive effect is to be executed in a determined ratio when there is (for example, FIG. 8-13, FIG. 8-17, FIG.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to the switching of the effect state.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (16) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
In the case of being controlled to the third effect state, the proportion of execution of the suggestive effect of the first type is lower than in the case of being controlled to the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8-19). ,
In the case of being controlled to the third effect state, the proportion of execution of the suggestive effect of the second type is lower than in the case of being controlled to the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8-19). ,
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the suggestive effect is executed while being controlled to the third effect state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (17) above relating to the characteristic portion 007AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
When the suggestive effect of the second type is executed when the control is performed in the third effect state, the second type is performed when the control is performed in the first effect state or the second effect state. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of is executed (for example, FIG. 8-20),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the suggestive effect is executed while being controlled to the third effect state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 008AK)
Feature 007AK includes feature 008AK below.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 008AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state, etc.) for a player,
A first effect state (for example, a state of being controlled in a normal mode) is a different effect state from the first effect state, and the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the same as the first effect state. 2 production states (for example, the state of being controlled to the color display expectation level up mode, etc.), production state control means (for example, FIGS. 8-10 to 8-12, etc.) that can be controlled,
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, FIGS. 8-27, Figure 8-34, etc.) and
with
The suggestive effect execution means is configured to, as the suggestive effects, a first type of suggestive effect (for example, a color-based display effect) and a second type of suggestive effect (for example, a character-based display effect) different from the first type of suggestive effect (for example, a character-based display effect). etc.) and can be executed (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-17 to FIG.
The first type suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled more than the first type suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled. When the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, FIG. 8-18 etc.),
In a predetermined period after notification of the control from the first effect state to the second effect state, a switching suggestion display (for example, mode switching preparation display, etc.) suggesting control to the second effect state. can be displayed (for example, Figures 8-8 to 8-12, Figure 8-27, etc.),
When a variable display execution condition (e.g., a start condition) is satisfied during the predetermined period, the execution of the first type suggestive effect for the variable display is restricted within the predetermined period, and the variable display is performed. Do not limit the execution of the second type of suggestive effect for
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the control to the second effect state is performed based on the switching suggestion display. In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing interest in the game due to the execution of the first type suggestive effect during the predetermined period in which the switch suggestive display is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the execution of the suggestive effect from being excessively restricted, thereby suppressing the decrease in the effect of the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that can be executed for the variable display that is the target of the suggestive effect, and that is capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state 8-13, 8-15, 8-32, 8-33, etc.),
The predetermined effect executing means has, as the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of weak winning) and a second predetermined effect (for example, It is possible to execute (for example, flash performance at the time of strong winning) and (for example, FIG. 8-15),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the execution of the second predetermined effect can be restricted (for example, FIG. 8-15),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the control is not performed to the advantageous state even though the second predetermined effect is executed, and the player's It is possible to prevent the expectation from being spoiled and improve the performance effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
An operation means (for example, cross key 33 etc.) that can be operated by the player is further provided,
It is possible to control from the first effect state to the second effect state based on the selection operation (for example, mode switching operation) performed by the player on the operation means (for example, FIGS. Figure 8-12, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to set the effect state according to the taste of the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine (2) or (3) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the execution of the first predetermined effect is not restricted (for example, FIG. 8-15),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in a situation where the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered due to an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the predetermined effect, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game. can.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
When it is controlled to the first effect state and is controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second effect state and is controlled to the advantageous state rather than when the predetermined effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state When the predetermined effect is executed at the time, the ratio of the suggestive effect to be executed is higher (for example, FIG. 8-15 etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation when the predetermined effect is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The suggestive effect executing means has a first mode (e.g., "blue") and a second mode (e.g., "green", "red", etc.) in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first mode. , the suggestive effect can be executed in any of a plurality of modes including (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-18, etc.),
It is controlled to the second effect state, and when the predetermined effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio at which the suggestive effect is executed in the first mode is higher than the second effect. Higher than the rate at which the suggested production is executed in the mode,
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion performance is executed in the first mode in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is lower than that in the second mode, the expectation of the player is maintained and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the second effect state is controlled, the first predetermined effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 8-15 etc.),
When the suggestive effect is not executed when the third effect state is controlled, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 8-15),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the third effect state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and reduce the interest in the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at least one of a plurality of timings within a specific period (for example, FIGS. 8-4, 8-24, 8-27, and 8-29 , Figure 8-31, etc.),
The specific period includes a first specific period and a second specific period after the first specific period (eg, FIG. 8-4, etc.),
The suggestive effect executing means performs the suggestive effect in a first pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed at least in the first specific period, and in the second specific period without executing the suggestive effect in the first specific period. It can be executed in one of the execution patterns of the second pattern for executing the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, etc.),
The first pattern is executed when the suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The ratio of execution of the suggestive effect at is high (for example, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
The second pattern is executed when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled than when the suggestive performance is executed when the first performance state is controlled. At a high rate of execution of the suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
When the suggestive effect is executed in the first pattern when the first effect state is controlled, the suggestive effect is executed in the second pattern when the first effect state is controlled. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the production is executed (eg, FIG. 8-19, etc.),
The suggestive performance is executed in the second pattern when the second performance state is controlled more than when the suggestive performance is executed in the first pattern when the second performance state is controlled. is executed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher (for example, FIG. 8-19),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the second effect state is controlled, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second specific period after the first specific period, It is possible to improve the performance effect.

(10) In the gaming machine (8) or (9) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
Said suggestive effect can be executed when controlled to said second effect state is greater than the number of timings within said specific period in which said suggestive effect can be executed when controlled to said first effect state. The number of timings within a specific period is smaller (eg, Figure 8-29),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the presentation effect.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, winning/losing effect, etc.) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled at a specific timing within the specific period (for example, FIGS. 8-4, 8-5, and 8-31 ~ Figure 8-34 etc.),
The suggestive effect can be executed at a special timing (for example, timing 07AKT5) that is substantially the same timing as the specific timing (for example, FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-29, etc.),
At the special timing, the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The ratio of execution of the suggestive effect is high (for example, FIG. 8-29, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation when the notification effect is executed in the state of being controlled to the third effect state.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
When the suggestive performance is executed while being controlled to the third performance state, it is controlled to the advantageous state, and is controlled to the advantageous state during the period from the start to the end of the suggestive performance. It is possible to execute a special effect (eg, premium effect) that definitely notifies that (eg, FIGS. 8-10, 8-18, 8-26, 8-31, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the special feeling when the suggestive effect is executed in the third effect state, thereby improving the game interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
When being controlled to the second effect state, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect of the first type is lower than when being controlled to the first effect state, while being controlled to the first effect state. The ratio of execution of the second type suggestive effect is higher than when there is (for example, FIG. 8-19),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, in the state of being controlled to the second effect state, even though the suggestive effect of the first type is executed, the advantageous state is not controlled, and the player's expectation is spoiled. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the excessive restriction on the execution of the suggestive effect.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
It is possible to limit the control from the second rendering state to the first rendering state in the predetermined period (for example, FIGS. 8-8, 8-11, 8-12, 8-27, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to frequent switching of the presentation state.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The suggestive effect executing means uses, as the second type of suggestive effect, a suggestive effect (e.g., red character pending display effect, etc.) and a suggestive effect of the second display mode that does not use the specific display element (for example, white character pending display effect, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-3, 8-19, Figure 8-20, etc.),
In the predetermined period, while restricting the execution of the suggestive effect of the first display mode, not restricting the execution of the suggestive effect of the second display mode (for example, FIGS. 8-19, 8-20, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, by executing the suggestive display effect in a display mode similar to the first type of suggestive effect, it is possible to suppress the player's misunderstanding and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (15) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 8-3, FIG. 8-18, etc.),
It is possible to determine in which of the plurality of modes the suggestive effect is to be executed at different determination ratios depending on whether the first effect state is controlled or the second effect state is controlled. Yes (e.g. Figures 8-18),
After the condition for executing variable display (for example, starting condition) is satisfied when the control is performed in the first effect state, the player performs the selection operation (for example, mode switching operation). Control is performed from the first rendering state to the second rendering state, and when the suggestive rendering targeting the variable display is started when being controlled to the second rendering state, it is controlled to the first rendering state. It is possible to decide in which of the plurality of modes the suggestive effect is to be executed in a determined ratio when there is (for example, FIG. 8-13, FIG. 8-17, FIG.
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load due to the switching of the effect state.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (16) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
In the case of being controlled to the third effect state, the proportion of execution of the suggestive effect of the first type is lower than in the case of being controlled to the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8-19). ,
In the case of being controlled to the third effect state, the proportion of execution of the suggestive effect of the second type is lower than in the case of being controlled to the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8-19). ,
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the suggestive effect is executed while being controlled to the third effect state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (17) above relating to the characteristic part 008AK,
The effect state control means can control a third effect state (for example, a state controlled to a color display premier mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state (for example, FIG. 8). -10 to Figure 8-12, etc.),
The advantageous state is achieved when the suggestive performance is executed when the third performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled. The controlled rate is high (for example, Figures 8-18, etc.),
When the suggestive effect of the second type is executed when the control is performed in the third effect state, the second type is performed when the control is performed in the first effect state or the second effect state. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of is executed (for example, FIG. 8-20),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of specialness when the suggestive effect is executed while being controlled to the third effect state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
A performance state control capable of controlling a first performance state and a second performance state which is a performance state different from the first performance state and has a probability of being controlled to the advantageous state common to the first performance state. means and
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
with
The advantageous state is obtained when the suggestive performance is executed when the second performance state is controlled rather than when the suggestive performance is executed when the control is performed in the first performance state. a high degree of control,
Further comprising a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing, as the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than the first predetermined effect,
When the suggestive performance is not executed when the second performance state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled, and when the second performance state is controlled, the suggestive performance is executed. The execution of the second predetermined effect can be restricted both when the control is performed to the advantageous state without
The predetermined effect executing means performs the above when the suggestive effect is not executed and the advantageous state is not controlled when the first effect state is controlled, and when the first effect state is controlled. The second predetermined effect can be executed both when the suggestive effect is not executed and when the advantageous state is controlled,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images